Home

8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer Service Guide

1. HP 85046A B HP 85047A Pin 8 Pin 8 Pin 22 Pin 23 Refl FWD S11 A R 45 0 45 Trans FWD 21 B R 5 0 5 Trans REV 12 B R 0 0 0 Refl REV 22 A R 0 0 0 Doubler OFF 0 5 m Proper voltages refer to the test set manual to continue troubleshooting For HP 85047A systems first see HP 85047A Note above to reset the analyzer a Wrong voltages replace the A16 rear panel assembly of the analyzer Remote Trigger Monitor pin 24 with an oscilloscope Press PRESET 5 V should be present during PRESET After PRESET a negative going pulse to zero volts about 200 nanoseconds long should be visible The pulse should be present at the beginning of each sweep To increase pulse visibility decrease number of points to 3 and decrease sweep time to 50 milliseconds on the analyzer m Proper pulse troubleshoot the test set by referring to its manual For HP 85047A systems first see HP 85047A Note above to reset the analyzer m Incorrect pulse replace the analyzer A16 rear panel assembly Sweep Delay This signal delays the start of the analyzer s sweep to allow for test set switch settling time It also distinguishes by encoding the HP 85047A from the 85046A B test sets See the test set manual for more detail For HP 85047A systems first see HP 85047A Note above to reset the analyzer DRAFT Accessories Troubleshooting 9 9 3 21 106 15 13 Contents 10 Ser
2. bb 11 Receiver Input Impedance Frequency Range B Return Loss A Return Loss R Return Loss Specification Measurement A R B R A B dB Uncertainty dB 300 kHz 2 MHz gt 20 0 58 2 MHz 1 3 GHz gt 23 0 58 1 3 GHz 3 GHz gt 20 0 58 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 15 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 14 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 12 Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy G F IG F Test Port 8496A Test Port Expected Dynamic Spec Meas Input Power Attn Measurement Measurement Accuracy dB Uncer dB dBm dBm Calculated dB Channel B 10 0 lt 0 075 0 008 20 Ref 10 Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference 30 20 lt 0 050 0 008 40 30 lt 0 050 0 008 50 40 lt 0 050 0 008 60 50 lt 0 058 0 017 70 60 lt 0 089 0 017 80 70 lt 0 240 0 017 90 80 lt 0 680 0 017 100 90 lt 1 950 0 027 Channel A 10 0 lt 0 075 0 008 20 Ref 10 Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference 30 20 lt 0 050 0 008 40 30 lt 0 050 0 008 50 40 lt 0 050 0 008 60 50 lt 0 058
3. Table 7 5 VCO Range Check Frequencies Instrument Setting Counter Reading 31 MHz 30 0 030 MHz 60 999999 MHz 60 0 060 MHz 4 Check the counter reading at the frequencies indicated m If the readings are within the limits specified the probability is greater than 90 that the fractional N assemblies are functional Fither skip ahead to the A7 Pulse Generator Check or perform the more conclusive A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope described below 7 22 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 m If the readings fail the specified limits perform the A14 VCO Exercise A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope 1 Remove the W9 HI OUT cable A14J1 to A7 from the A7 assembly and connect it to an oscilloscope set for 50 ohm input impedance Switch on the analyzer 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to activate the FRACN TUNE service mode See Chapter 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages for more information on the FRACN TUNE mode 3 Vary the fractional N VCO frequency with the front panel knob and check the signal with the oscilloscope The waveform should resemble Figure 7 17 Figure 7 18 and Figure 7 19 If the fractional N output signals are correct continue source troubleshooting by skipping ahead to A7 Pulse Generator Check Figure HO107 here Figure 7 17 10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 23 3 21 10
4. The 70 dB step attenuator contained in the test set is used to adjust the power level to the DUT without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path The attenuator in the HP 85046A B or HP 85047A test set is controlled from the front panel of the analyzer using the ATTENUATOR PORT 1 or ATTENUATOR PORT 2 softkeys located in the power menu The Receiver Block The receiver block contains three sampler mixers for the R A and B inputs The signals are sampled and down converted to produce a 4 kHz IF intermediate frequency A multiplexer sequentially directs each of the three IF signals to the ADC analog to digital converter where it is converted from an analog to a digital signal to be measured and processed for viewing on the display Both amplitude and phase information are measured simultaneously regardless of what is displayed on the analyzer The Microprocessor A microprocessor takes the raw data and performs all the required error correction trace math formatting scaling averaging and marker operations according to the instructions from the front panel or over HP IB The formatted data is then displayed Required Peripheral Equipment In addition to the analyzer and the test set a system requires calibration standards for vector accuracy enhancement and cables for interconnections A Close Look at the Analyzer s Functional Groups The operation of the analyzer is most logically described in five f
5. 5 kHz for Option 006 Otherwise locate the A12 assembly red extractors and adjust the VCXO ADJ for a spectrum analyzer center frequency measurement of 5 kHz See Figure 3 19 7 Replace the A12 assembly if you are unable to adjust the frequency as specified Repeat this adjustment test Figure VCXO here Figure 3 19 Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment 3 46 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 HP 8753D Option 011 with Option 1D5 Only 8 Connect the BNC to BNC jumper between the EXT REF and the 10 MHz Precision Reference as shown in Figure 3 20 9 Use a flat head screwdriver to remove the screw that covers the precision frequency adjustment as shown in Figure 3 20 Insert a narrow screwdriver and adjust the precision frequency reference potentiometer for a spectrum analyzer center frequency measurement of 5 Hz Figure OPT1D5 here Figure 3 20 High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location 10 Replace the A26 board assembly if you cannot adjust for a center frequency measurement of 50 Hz DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 47 3 21 106 15 11 High Low Band Transition Adjustment Required Equipment and Tools Non metallic adjustment tool 2 0 0 0 cece eee eee HP P N 8830 0024 Antistatic wrist strap HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap cord 2 0 0 0 cece cece nee e nee eee eens HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire ss HP P N
6. 90 80 lt 0 680 0 017 100 90 lt 1 950 0 027 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2a 15 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 15 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 13 Receiver Comp ression Magnitude CW Frequency Start Power Stop Power Measured Specification Measurement ABm ABm Value dB Uncertainty dB Channel A 50 MHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 1 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 2 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 3 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB Channel B 50 MHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 1 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 2 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 3 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB Channel R 50 MHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 1 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 2 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 3 GHz lt 0 32 dB 0 1 dB 2a 16 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 16 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 14 Receiver Compression Phase CW Frequency Start Power Stop Power Measured Specification Measurement ABm ABm Value degrees Uncertainty degrees Channel A 50 MHz lt 5 2 N A 1 GHz lt 5 2 N A 2 GHz lt 5 2 N A 3 GHz lt 5 2 N A Channel B 50 MHz
7. 0 017 70 60 lt 0 089 0 017 80 70 lt 0 240 0 017 90 80 lt 0 680 0 017 100 90 lt 1 950 0 027 2b 16 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 15 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 13 Receiver Compression Magnitude CW Frequency Start Power Stop Power Measured Specification Measurement dBm dBm Value dB Uncertainty dB Channel A 50 MHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 1 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 2 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 3 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 4 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 5 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 6 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB Channel B 50 MHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 1 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 2 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 3 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 4 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 5 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 6 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB Channel R 50 MHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 1 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 2 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 3 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 4 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 5 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB 6 GHz lt 0 32 0 1 DB DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 17 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 16 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model
8. 18 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers 3 21 106 Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 16 Magnitude Frequency Response Analyzer Ext Power Input A Input B Max Diff Spec Meas Frequency Source Meter Value Value Spec dB Uncer Freq Value dB 16 MHz 32 MHz 1 0 07 16 MHz 48 MHz 1 0 07 31 MHz 62 MHz 1 0 07 31 MHz 93 MHz 1 0 07 61 MHz 122 MHz 1 0 07 61 MHz 183 MHz 1 0 07 121 MHz 242 MHz 1 0 07 121 MHz 363 MHz 1 0 07 180 MHz 360 MHz 1 0 07 180 MHz 540 MHz 1 0 07 310 MHz 620 MHz 1 0 07 310 MHz 930 MHz 1 0 07 700 MHz 1 4 GHz 1 0 07 700 MHz 2 1 GHz 1 0 07 1 GHz 2 GHz 1 0 07 1 GHz 3 GHz 1 0 07 1 5 GHz 3 GHz 1 0 07 2 GHz 4 GHz 2 0 07 2 GHz 6 GHz 2 0 22 3 GHz 6 GHz 2 0 22 2b 20 Performance Test Record DRAFT 15 21 Contents 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Post Repair Procedures for HP 8753D Option 011 2 2020202 3 2 A9 CC Jumper Positions Co 3 5 Source Default Correction Constants Test Mo 3 6 Source Pretune Default Correction Constants Test 45 2 2 2 3 7 Analog Bus Correction Constant Test 46 a a a a a a a a a 3 8 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 2 2 3 9 Power Sensor Calibr
9. 231 6101 California Southern Hewlett Packard Co 1421 South Manhattan Ave Fullerton CA 92631 714 999 6700 Illinois Hewlett Packard Co 545 E Algonquin Rd Arlington Heights IL 60005 847 342 2000 EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Hewlett Packard S A 150 Route du Nant d Avril 1217 Meyrin 2 Geneva Switzerland 41 22 780 8111 Great Britain Hewlett Packard Ltd Eskdale Road Winnersh Triangle Wokingham Berkshire RG41 5DZ England 44 734 696622 France Hewlett Packard France 1 Avenue Du Canada Zone D Activite De Courtaboeuf F 91947 Les Ulis Cedex France 33 1 69 82 60 60 Germany Hewlett Packard GmbH Hewlett Packard Strasse 61352 Bad Homburg v d H Germany 49 6172 16 0 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 15 Safety and Licensing 15 3 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices continued INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Hewlett Packard Company 3495 Deer Creek Road Palo Alto California USA 94304 1316 415 857 5027 China China Hewlett Packard Company 38 Bei San Huan X1 Road Shuang Yu Shu Hai Dian District Beijing China 86 1 256 6888 Taiwan Hewlett Packard Taiwan 8th Floor H P Building 337 Fu Hsing North Road Taipei Taiwan 886 2 712 0404 Australia Hewlett Packard Australia Ltd 31 41 Joseph Street Blackburn Victoria 3130 61 3 895 2895 Japan Hewlett Packard Japan Ltd 9 1 Takakura Cho Hachioji Tokyo 19
10. A9BT1 Battery Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 33 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A15 Preregulator Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Disconnect the wire bundle A15W1 from A8J2 and A17J3 3 Remove the preregulator A15 from the frame Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note a When reinstalling the preregulator A15 make sure the three grommets item 1 on A15W1 are seated in the two slots item 2 on the back side of the preregulator and the slot item 3 in the card cage wall a After reinstalling the preregulator A15 be sure to set the line voltage selector to the appropriate setting 115 V or 230 V 14 34 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A15 Preregulator Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 35 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A16 Rear Panel Interface Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver m 3 16 inch hex nut driver m 9 16 inch hex nut driver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 If you have Option 1D5 disconnect W30 from the rear panel interface board A16 3 Remove
11. Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Input Impedance replace assembly only or On Site Verification A7 Pulse Generator A9CC Jumper Positions Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 53 EEPROM Backup Disk Frequency Response Frequency Range and Accuracy Spectral Purity phase noise or On Site Verification A8 Post Regulator A9CC Jumper Positions Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC Test 54 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking EEPROM Backup Disk Internal Test 0 Check A8 test point voltages 14 52 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 15 Table 14 1 Related Service Procedures 2 of 3 Serial Number CC Test 55 Option Number CC Test 56 Display Intensity and Focus CC Test 49 Source Def CC Test 44 Pretune Default CC Test 45 Analog Bus CC Test 46 Cal Kit Default Test 57 Source Pretune CC Test 48 RF Output Power CC Test 47 Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 53 ADC Linearity CC Test 52 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC Test 54 EEPROM Backup Disk Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants CC A9 cpul A9CC Jumper Positions Output Power Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Dynamic Accuracy or On Site Verification Firmware Rev 5 20 08753 60185 A9CC Jumper Positions Source Default CC 9 Test 44 Pretune Default CC Test 45 Analog Bus CC Test 46
12. COUPLED CHAN OFF START 36 M u STOP 60 75 M u MENU SWEEP TIME 12 5 k m MEAS ANALOG IN 29 x1 FN VCO TUN SCALE REF 6 x1 REF VALUE 7 x1 MKR CH 2 MENU CW FREQ 31 0001 M u SWEEP TIME 12 375 k m MEAS ANALOG IN 29 x1 FN VCO TUN SCALE REF 2 x1 REF VALUE 6 77 x1 MKR 6 k m Sequence FNCHK checks the VCO adjustment MENU CW FREQ 1 G n SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON SERVICE MODES FRAC N TUNE ON MEAS ANALOG IN 29 x1 MKR SCALE REF REF VALUE 7 x1 3 60 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 11 Sequences for the Fractional N Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Sequence APIADJ sets up the fractional N API spur adjustments TITLE S 2 5K PERIPHERAL HPIB ADDR 18 x1 TITLE TO PERIPHERAL WAIT x U xl TITLE AT 0DB TITLE TO PERIPHERAL WAIT x U xl TITLE RM 100HZ TITLE TO PERIPHERAL WAIT x U xl TITLE CF 676 145105MZ TITLE TO PERIPHERAL WAIT x U xl CW FREQ 676 045105M u TITLE ADJ A13 100KHZ SEQUENCE PAUSE TITLE CF 676 048105MZ TITLE TO PERIPHERAL WAIT x U xl TITLE ADJ A13 APII SEQUENCE PAUSE TITLE CF 676 007515MZ TITLE TO PERIPHERAL WAIT x U xl CW FREQ 676 004515M u TITLE ADJ A13 APR SEQUENCE DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 61 3 21 106 15 11 PAUSE TITLE CF 676 003450MZ TITLE TO PERIPHERAL WATT x U xl CW FREQ 676 000450M u TITLE ADJ A13 API3 SEQUENCE PAUSE TITLE CF 676 003045MZ TITLE TO PERIPHERAL WAIT x U x1 CW FREQ 676 000045M u
13. CW Frequency Source Output First Value Second Value Path Loss Power Level dB dB dB dBm 300 kHz 10 20 MHz 10 50 MHz 10 100 MHz 10 200 MHz 10 500 MHz 10 1 GHz 10 2 GHz 10 3 GHz 10 4 GHz 10 5 GHz 10 6 GHz 10 2b 4 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 4 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 2 Source Power Range Linearity and Accuracy Power Range and Power Linearity Source Power Level Power Path Loss Measured Power Spec Meas dBm Offset dB Value Linearity dB Uncer dB dB dB dB CW Frequency 300kHz 5 15 0 25 0 02 3 13 0 25 0 02 1 11 0 25 0 02 1 9 0 25 0 02 3 7 0 25 0 02 5 5 0 25 0 02 7 3 0 25 0 0 9 1 0 25 0 0 11 1 0 25 0 0 13 3 0 25 0 0 15 5 0 5 0 0 18 8 0 5 0 17 CW Frequency 3 GHz 5 15 0 25 0 02 3 13 0 25 0 02 1 11 0 25 0 02 1 9 0 25 0 02 3 7 0 25 0 02 5 5 0 25 0 02 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 5 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 4 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers continued Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and
14. The voltage level of this node indicates whether an external reference timebase is being used a No external reference about 0 9 V a With external reference about 0 6 V Node 27 VCXO Tune 40 MHz VCXO tuning voltage Perform step A12 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 27 x1 MARKER FCTN MARKER REFERENCE This node displays the voltage used to fine tune the A12 reference VCXO to 40 MHz You should see a flat line at some voltage level the actual voltage level varies from instrument to instrument Anything other than a flat line indicates that the VCXO is tuning to different frequencies Refer to the Frequency Accuracy adjustment procedure Node 28 A12 Gnd 2 Ground reference A14 Fractional N Digital To observe the A14 analog bus nodes perform step A14 below Then follow the node specific instructions Step Al4 Press PRESET MEAS ANALOG IN SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON FORMAT MORE REAL DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 35 3 21 106 15 14 Node 29 FN VCO Tun A14 FN VCO tuning voltage Perform step A14 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 29 x1 SCALE REF AUTOSCALE Observe the A14 FN VCO tuning voltage If the A13 and A14 assemblies are functioning correctly and the VCO is phase locked the trace should look like Figure 10 15 Any other waveform indicates that the FN VCO is not phase locked The vertical lines in the trace indicate the band crossings T
15. Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables 2 2 9 5 9 2 Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short a and Open b 2 9 6 9 3 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU a 9 7 9 4 Analyzer Rear Panel Test Set Interconnect Connector Pins a 9 7 Tables 9 1 Components Related to Specific Error Terms 2 2 1 9 4 9 2 Attenuation Voltage Matrix 2 a 9 8 9 3 Measurement Voltage Matrix 2 2 2 a 9 9 Contents 2 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 9 Accessories Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise Measurement failures can be divided into two categories m Failures which don t affect the normal functioning of the analyzer but render incorrect measurement data m Failures which impede the normal functioning of the analyzer or prohibit the use of a feature This chapter addresses the first category of failures which are usually caused by the following E operator errors m faulty calibration devices or connectors m bad cables or adapters m improper calibration techniques a RF cabling problems within the test set These failures are checked using the following procedures m Inspect the Accessories m Inspect the Error Terms a Test Set Troubleshooting DRAFT Accessories Troubleshooting 9 1 3 21 106 15 13 Assembly Replacement Sequence The
16. and shown graphically on the plots in this chapter If the magnitude exceeds its limit inspect the corresponding system component If the condition causes system verification to fail replace the component DRAFT Error Terms 11 1 3 21 106 15 14 Consider the following while troubleshooting 1 All parts of the system including cables and calibration devices can contribute to systematic errors and impact the error terms Connectors must be clean gaged and within specification for error term analysis to be meaningful Avoid unnecessary bending and flexing of the cables following measurement calibration minimizing cable instability errors Use good connection techniques during the measurement calibration The connector interface must be repeatable Refer to the Principles of Microwave Connector Care section in the Service Equipment and Analyzer Options chapter for information on connection techniques and on cleaning and gaging connectors Use error term analysis to troubleshoot minor subtle performance problems Refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter if a blatant failure or gross measurement error is evident It is often worthwhile to perform the procedure twice using two distinct measurement calibrations to establish the degree of repeatability If the results do not seem repeatable check all connectors and cables Full Two Port Error Correction Procedure Note This is the m
17. holding the semi rigid cables against the card cage assembly Remove the bracket 6 Remove the right side trim strip item 4 from the front frame Remove the screw item 5 that secures the right end of the Type N connector bracket 14 16 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Type N Connector Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 17 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Type N Connector Assembly 7 Remove the three screws item 6 from the bottom edge of the front frame that secure the connector bracket Remove the connector assembly item 7 Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note When reconnecting semi rigid cables it is recommended that the connections be torqued to 10 in lb 14 18 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Type N Connector Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 19 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A1 Keyboard Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver m small slot screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap m 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in lb Removal 1 Remove the front panel interface board refer to A2 Front Panel Interface in this chapter 2 Remove the eight screws item 2 that attach the front panel keyboard assembly A1 to the front panel Detach the keyboard a
18. lt 5 2 N A 1 GHz lt 5 2 N A 2 GHz lt 5 2 N A 3 GHz lt 5 2 N A Channel R 50 MHz lt 5 2 N A 1 GHz lt 5 2 N A 2 GHz lt 5 2 N A 3 GHz lt 5 2 N A DRAFT Performance Test Record 2a 17 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 17 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 15 Source and Receiver Harmonics Stop Frequency Harmonic Specification Measured Value Measurement GHz dBc Uncertainty dB Source Harmonics 1 5 2nd lt 25 1 1 0 3rd lt 25 1 Source and Receiver Harmonics 1 5 A 2nd lt 15 1 1 0 A 3rd lt 30 1 1 5 B 2nd lt 15 1 1 0 B 3rd lt 30 1 Receiver Harmonics 1 5 B 2nd lt 15 1 1 0 B 3rd lt 30 1 1 5 A 2nd lt 15 1 1 0 A 3rd lt 30 1 2a 18 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 18 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 16 Magnitude Frequency Response 3 21 106 15 21 Analyzer Ext Power Input A Input B Max Diff Spec Meas Frequency Source Meter Value Value Spec dB Uncer Freq Value dB 16 MHz 32 MHz 1 t 0
19. not its regularity Refer to the cable manual for return loss specifications 9 4 Accessories Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Figure LOSS9 here Figure 9 1 Typical Return Loss Traces of Good and Poor Cables Verify Shorts and Opens Substitute a known good short and open of the same connector type and sex as the short and open in question If the devices are not from one of the standard calibration kits refer to the HP 8753D Network Analyzer User s Guide for information on how to use the MODIFY CAL KIT function Set aside the short and open that are causing the problem l Perform an 11 l port calibration using the good short and open Then press FORMAT SMITH CHART to view the devices in Smith chart format 2 Connect the good short to port 1 Press ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the left side of the circle see Figure 9 2a left Replace the good short with the questionable short at port 1 The trace of the questionable short should appear very similar to the known good short 3 Connect the good open to port 1 Press SCALE REF ELECTRICAL DELAY and turn the front panel knob to enter enough electrical delay so that the trace appears as a dot at the right side of the circle see Figure 9 2b right Replace the good open with the questionable open at port 1 The trace of the questionable open should appear very similar to the known good op
20. the response to front panel or HP IB commands is unexpected troubleshoot the digital control group 2 Perform the Analog Bus test Press RETURN 19 x1 EXECUTE TEST m If this test fails refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting m If this test passes continue with the next procedure to check the source DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 11 3 21 106 15 12 Source Phase Lock Error Messages The error messages listed below are usually indicative of a source failure or improper instrument configuration Ensure that the R channel input is receiving at least 35 dBm power Continue with this procedure m NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL The first IF was not detected during the pretune stage of phase lock m NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL The first IF was detected at the pretune stage but phase lock could not be acquired thereafter m PHASE LOCK LOST Phase lock was acquired but then lost m PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed at power on when pretune values drift or when phase lock problems are detected A problem spoiled a calibration attempt m POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK The analyzer is achieving phase lock but possibly on the wrong harmonic comb tooth m SWEEP TIME TOO FAST The fractional N and the digital IF circuits have lost synchronization 4 12 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Check Source Output Power 1 Connect th
21. 0 25 0 0 15 5 0 5 0 0 17 7 0 5 0 17 20 10 0 5 0 17 CW Freq 3 GHz 5 15 0 25 0 02 3 13 0 25 0 02 1 11 0 25 0 02 1 9 0 25 0 02 3 7 0 25 0 02 5 5 0 25 0 02 7 3 0 25 0 0 9 1 0 25 0 0 11 1 0 25 0 0 13 3 0 25 0 0 15 5 0 5 0 0 17 7 0 5 0 17 20 10 0 5 0 17 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2a 5 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 5 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 2 Source Power Range Linearity and Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency Path Loss Calibrated Measured Power Level Spec Meas MHz dB Power Level Value Accuracy dB Uncer dB dB dB dB Source Output Power Level 10dBm 0 300 1 0 0 33 20 000 1 0 0 10 50 000 1 0 0 10 100 000 1 0 0 11 200 000 1 0 0 11 500 000 1 0 0 11 1000 000 1 0 0 11 2000 000 1 0 0 20 3000 000 1 0 0 20 2a 6 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 6 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial
22. 15 14 Since the chosen VCO harmonic and the source differ by 0 500 or 0 333 MHz then another VCO harmonic 2 or 3 times higher in frequency will be exactly 1 000 MHz away from the 2nd or 3rd harmonic of the source frequency The samplers then will also down convert these harmonics to yield the desired components in the Ist IF at 1 000 MHz Narrow bandpass filters in the receiver eliminate all but the 1 000 MHz signals these pass through to be processed and displayed Figure HARBLK12 here Figure 12 6 Harmonic Analysis External Source Mode In external source mode the analyzer phase locks its receiver to an external signal source This source must be CW not swept but it does not need to be synthesized The user must enter the source frequency into the analyzer The analyzer s internal source output is not used To accomplish this the phase lock loop is reconnected so that the tuning voltage from the All phase lock assembly controls the VCO of the A14 fractional N assembly and not the A3 source See Figure 12 7 The VCO s output still drives the Ist LO of the samplers and down converts the RF signal supplied by the external source The resulting 1st IF is fed back to the All phase lock assembly compared to the 1 000 MHz reference and used to generate a tuning voltage as usual However the tuning voltage controls the VCO to lock on to the external source keeping the 1st IF at exactly 1 000 MHz The analyzer normally goes
23. 22 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Node 4 Det detects RF OUT power level Perform step A3 above to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press MEAS ANALOG IN 4 x1 SCALE REF AUTO SCALE Node 4 detects power that is coupled and detected from the RF OUT arm to the ALC loop Note that the voltage exponentially follows the power level inversely Flat segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between 15 dBm and 10 dBm Figure NODE4 here Figure 10 7 Analog Bus Node 4 DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 23 3 21 106 15 14 Node 5 Temp temperature sensor This node registers the temperature of the cavity oscillator which must be known for effective spur avoidance The sensitivity is 10 mV per degree Kelvin The oscillator changes frequency slightly as its temperature changes This sensor indicates the temperature so that the frequency can be predicted Node 6 Integ ALC leveling integrator output Perform step A3 above to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press MEAS ANALOG IN 6 x1 SCALE REF AUTO SCALE Node 6 displays the output of the summing circuit in the ALC loop Absolute voltage level variations are normal Flat segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between 15 dBm and 10 dBm Figure NODE6 here Figure 10 8 Analog Bus Node 6 10 24 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Node 7 Log log amplifie
24. 25 3 9 Input B Sampler Correction Setup 3 26 3 10 Setup for Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant Rontine 3 28 3 11 Typical Display of Spurs with a Filter 3 29 3 12 Typical Display of Four Spurs without a Filter 3 30 3 13 Target Spur in Display of Five Spurs 3 31 3 14 Target Spur Almost Invisible 3 31 3 15 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Locations 3 40 3 16 Location of the FN VCO Adjustment 3 42 3 17 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Display 3 43 3 18 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup 3 45 3 19 Location of the VCXO ADJ Adjustment 3 46 3 20 High Stability Frequency Adjustment Location 3 47 3 21 High Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace 3 48 3 22 High Low Band Adjustment Locations 3 49 3 23 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 3 51 3 24 Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments 3 52 3 25 Location of All Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments 3 54 3 26 Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes 3 55 Tables 3 1 Related Service Procedures 3 2 3 2 Power Meter Readings 3 12 DRAFT Contents 3 3 21 106 15 11 Adjustments and Correction Constants This chapter has the following adjustment procedures A9 CC Jumper Positions m Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 m Source Pretune Default Correction Constants Test 45 m Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 46 a RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 m Source Pretune Corr
25. 400 M 41 SPAN 50 M 4 4 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 11 1 5 Press MORE REAL SCALE REF 10 k m MARKERREFERENCE 6 Observe the phase locked loop error voltage m If spikes are not visible on the analyzer display see Figure 3 26 no adjustment is necessary m If spikes are excessive see Figure 3 26 adjust the CAV ADJ potentiometer on the A3 source bias assembly to eliminate the spikes See Figure 3 25 m If the spikes persist refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter Figure SPIKES here Figure 3 26 Display of Acceptable versus Excessive Spikes DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 55 3 21 106 15 11 Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants Analyzer warm up Time None This procedure stores the instrument s unprotected option s information in A9 CPU assembly EEPROMs 1 2 3 5 Make sure the A9 CC jumper is in the ALT ALTER position Record the installed options that are printed on the rear panel of the analyzer Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE ADDRESS Refer to the table below for the address of each unprotected hardware option Enter the address for the specific installed hardware option that needs to be enabled or disabled Follow the address entry by POKE 1 x1 m Pressing POKE 1 1 after an entry enables the option m Pressing POKE 0 x1 aft
26. 8 Option W32 2 1 8 Option W52 7 ww a 1 8 Option W34 2 A 1 8 Option W54 2 ee 1 9 Index DRAFT Contents 1 3 21 106 15 06 Tables 1 1 Required Tools 1 1 1 2 Service Test Equipment 1 2 1 3 Connector Care Quick Reference 1 6 DRAFT Contents 2 3 21 106 15 06 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Table of Service Test Equipment DRAFT 3 21 106 15 06 Table 1 1 Required Tools T 8 T 10 T 15 and T 20 TORX screwdrivers Flat blade screwdrivers small medium and large 5 16 inch open end wrench for SMA nuts 3 16 5 16 and 9 16 inch hex nut drivers 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in lb 2 5 mm hex key driver Non conductive and non ferrous adjustment tool Needle nose pliers Tweezers Anti static work mat with wrist strap Floppy Disk 3 5 inch Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 1 Table 1 2 Service Test Equipment Required Critical Recommended Use Equipment Specifications Model Spectrum Analyzer Frequency Accuracy 7 Hz HP 8563E A T Frequency Counter Frequency 300 kHz 3 GHz 6 GHz for Option HP 5350B P 006 Synthesized Sweeper aximum spurious input lt 30 dBc Residual HP 836404 P FM lt 20 kHz Oscilloscope Bandwidth 100 MHz any T Accuracy 10 Digital Voltmeter Resolution 10 mV any T Power Meter HP IB o substitute HP 437A or 438A A P T Power Sensor Frequency 300 kHz 3 GHz HP 8482A A P T Power Sensor for Option 006 Fre
27. 90 Nits would be 150 Nits without the bezel installed 9 Adjust the analyzer front panel knob to the maximum clockwise position m If the photometer registers greater than 90 Nits or 150 Nits without the bezel turn the front panel knob until a reading of no more than 90 Nits registers on the photometer DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 17 3 21 106 15 11 m If the photometer registers a reading of less than 90 Nits or 150 Nits without the bezel and greater than 60 Nits or 100 without the bezel proceed to Operating Default Intensity Adjustment a If the photometer registers a reading of less than 60 Nits or 100 Nits without the bezel the display is faulty Operating Default Intensity Adjustment This adjustment sets the preset default level of the display intensity If you switch the power off and on the analyzer uses this default level to ensure that the display is visible and eliminates concern that the display may not be functioning 10 Press the top softkey on the analyzer to bring up the next display adjustment mode 11 Center the photometer on the analyzer display as shown in Figure 3 5 12 Adjust the analyzer front panel knob until the photometer registers 60 Nits or 100 Nits without bezel installed 13 Press the top softkey on the analyzer and observe the display m If DONE is displayed on the analyzer the adjustment is done This completes the series of three Display Intensity Ad
28. 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment centers the VCO voltage controlled oscillator of the A12 reference assembly for high and low band operations 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON START 11 m 0 STOP 21 Me to observe part of both the low and high bands on the analog bus 2 Press MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 22 lt 1 FORMAT MORE REAL DISPLAY DATAMEM DATA MEMORY to subtract the ground voltage from the next measurement 3 Press MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 23 x1 MARKER 11 M y 4 Press SCALE REF 1 x1 and observe the VCO tuning trace m If the left half of trace 0 1000 mV and right half of trace 100 to 200 mV higher one to two divisions no adjustment is necessary See Figure 3 21 m If the adjustment is necessary follow these steps a Remove the upper rear bumpers and top cover using a torx screwdriver b Adjust the VCO tune see Figure 3 22 to position the left half of the trace to 0 125 mV This is a very sensitive adjustment where the trace could easily go off of the screen c Adjust the HBLB see Figure 3 22 to position the right half of the trace 125 to 175 mV about 1 to 1 5 divisions higher than the left half m Refer to Source Troubleshooting if you cannot perform the adjustment Figure HIGHLOW here Figure 3 21 High Low Band Transition Adjustment Trace 3 48 Adjustments and C
29. 999 980 2 000 020 0 003 403 000 3 000 0 2 999 970 3 000 030 0 005 104 000 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2a 3 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 3 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Serial Number Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Date bb 2 Source Power Range Linearity and Accuracy Path Loss Calculations Worksheet CW Frequency Source Output First Value Second Value Path Loss Power Level dB dB dB dBm 300 kHz 10 20 MHz 10 50 MHz 10 100 MHz 10 200 MHz 10 500 MHz 10 1 GHz 10 2 GHz 10 3 GHz 10 2a 4 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 4 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 2 Source Power Range Linearity and Accuracy Power Range and Power Linearity Source Power Level Power Path Loss Measured Power Spec Meas dBm Offset dB Value Linearity dB Uncer dB dB dB dB CW Freq 300 kHz 5 15 0 25 0 02 3 13 0 25 0 02 1 11 0 25 0 02 1 9 0 25 0 02 3 7 0 25 0 02 5 5 0 25 0 02 7 3 0 25 0 0 9 1 0 25 0 0 11 1 0 25 0 0 13 3
30. A13 and A14 fractional N circuits It allows you to directly control and monitor the output frequency of the fractional N synthesizer 10 MHz to 60 MHz Set the instrument to CW sweep mode and then set FRACN TUNE ON Change frequencies with the front panel keys or knob The output of the A14 assembly can be checked at A14J1 HI OUT in high band or A14J2 LO OUT in low band with an oscilloscope a frequency counter or a spectrum analyzer Signal jumps and changes in shape at 20 MHz and 30 MHz when tuning up in frequency and at 29 2 MHz and 15 MHz when tuning down are due to switching of the digital divider This mode can be used with the SRC TUNE mode as described in Source Troubleshooting chapter Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 13 ORC ADJUST MENU SOURCE PLL ON off SM3 PLL AUTO ON off SM4 PLL DIAG on OFF SM5 Accesses the functions that allow you to adjust the source m SRC TUNE on OFF Tests the pretune functions of the phase lock and source assemblies Use the entry controls to set RF OUT to any frequency from 300 KHz to 3 GHz When in this mode 1 Set analyzer to CW frequency before pressing SRC TUNE ON 2 RF OUT is 1 MHz to 6 MHz above indicated entered frequency 3 Instrument does not attempt to phase lock 4 Residual FM increases m SRC TUNE FREQ m ALC ON off Toggles the automatic leveling control ALC on and off m MAIN PWR DAC R SLOPE DAC R SRC ADJUST DACS R HB FLIR S
31. A3 Source A9 CC Jumper Positions Source Def CC Test 44 Analog Bus CC Test 46 Source Pretune CC Test 48 RF Output Power CC Test 47 Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC Test 54 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking EEPROM Backup Disk Output Power Spectral Purity harmonics and mixer spurs or System Verification A4 A5 A6 Samplers A9CC Jumper Positions Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 53 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 EEPROM Backup Disk Minimum R Level if R sampler replaced Input Crosstalk Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Input Impedance replace assembly only or System Verification A7 Pulse Generator A9CC Jumper Positions Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 53 EEPROM Backup Disk Frequency Response Frequency Range and Accuracy Spectral Purity phase noise or System Verification A8 Post Regulator A9CC Jumper Positions Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC Test 54 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking EEPROM Backup Disk Internal Test 0 Check A8 test point voltages 3 2 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 11 Table 3 1 Related Service Procedures 2 of 3 Serial Number CC Test 55 Option Number CC Test 56 Display Intensity and Focus CC Test 49 Source Def CC Test 44 Pretune Default CC Test 45 Analog Bus CC Test 46 Cal Kit Default Test 57 Source Pretune CC Test 48 RF Output Power CC Test 47 Sample
32. CA PACKARD Printed in USA DRAFT 3 21 106 15 16 HP part number 08753 90406 Supersedes October 1997 Printed in USA December 1997 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1995 1996 1997 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws 1400 Fountaingrove Parkway Santa Rosa CA 95403 1799 USA Contents 1 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options Table of Service Test Equipment 2 2 20222040 1 1 Principles of Microwave Connector Care 1 ee ee 1 5 Analyzer Options Available Cc ee 1 7 Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference Ce 1 7 Option 002 Harmonic Mode o 1 7 Option 006 6 GHz Operation 2 2 a ee 1 7 Option 010 Time Domain Lo ee 1 7 Option 1CM Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles e 1 7 Option 1CP Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles 1 7 Service and Support Options PPP 1 8 Option W31 o e 1 8 Option W51 2 a 1
33. Constants Test 54 E E DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 37 3 21 106 15 11 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure Required Equipment and Tools 3 5 inch floppy disk 0 0 0 0 cece cence eee eee nee ened HP 92192A box of 10 Antistatic wrist strap HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap cord 2 0 ccc eee rn HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire sse HP P N 9300 0797 The correction constants that are unique to your instrument are stored in EEPROM on the A9 controller assembly By creating an EEPROM backup disk you will have a copy of all the correction constant data should you need to replace or repair the A9 assembly 1 Insert a 3 5 inch disk into the analyzer disk drive 2 If the disk is not formatted follow these steps a Press SAVE RECALL FILE UTILITIES FORMAT DISK b Select the format type m To format a LIF disk select FORMAT LIF m To format a DOS disk select FORMAT DOS C Press FORMAT INT DISK and answer YES at the query 3 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE STORE EEPR ON SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK RETURN SAVE STATE Note The analyzer creates a default file FILEO The filename appears in the upper left corner of the display The file type ISTATE E indicates that the file is an instrument state with EEPROM backup 4 Press FILE UTILITIES RENAME FILE ERASE TITLE Use the front panel knob and the SELECT LETTER softkey or an ext
34. DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Figures 7 1 Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup cc 7 4 7 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU o 7 5 7 3 Sampler Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram Lo a 7 6 7 4 Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode 7 8 7 5 Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output i in SRC Tune Mode 7 8 7 6 1V GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL Of 7 10 7 7 YO and YO Coil Drive Voltage Differences with SOURCE PLL OFF 7 11 7 8 Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 any frequency 2 2 aa 7 14 7 9 High Band REF Signal gt 16 MHz CW 2 7 15 7 10 REF Signal at ALITP9 5 MHz CW 2 2 7 16 7 11 Typical FN LO Waveform at A12 a aa a L 7 17 7 12 4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP9 Preset 7 18 7 13 90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Signals gt 16 MHz CW o 7 19 7 14 In Phase Low Band 2nd LO Signals 14 MHz CW 7 20 7 15 L ENREF Line at A12P2 16 Preset 2 2 2 2 0 7 21 7 16 Complementary L HB and L LB Signals Preset e 7 22 7 17 10 MHz HI OUT Waveform from Al4J1 2 2 2 7 23 7 18 25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from Al4J1 2 2 a a a ee 7 24 7 19 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from Al4J1 2 2 7 24 7 20 LO OUT Waveform at AI4J2 2 7 2 o 7 25 7 21 A14 Generated Digital Control Signals o 7 27 7 22 H MB Signal at A14P1 5 Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep Cor 7 27 7 23 Puls
35. It opens the phase locked loop and exercises the source by varying the source output frequency with the All pretune DAC Note If the analyzer failed internal test 48 default pretune correction constants were stored which may result in a constant offset of several MHz Regardless continue with this procedure Note Use a spectrum analyzer for problems above 100 MHz 1 Connect the oscilloscope or spectrum analyzer as shown in Figure 7 1 Set the oscilloscope input impedance to 50 ohms 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SRC ADJUST MENU SRC TUNE ON SRC TUNE FREQ to activate the source tune SRC TUNE service mode 3 Use the front panel knob or front panel keys to set the pretune frequency to 300 kHz 30 MHz and 40 MHz Verify the signal frequency on the oscilloscope Note In SRC TUNE mode the source output frequency changes in 1 to 2 MHz increments and should be 1 to 6 MHz above the indicated output frequency 4 Check for the frequencies indicated by Table 7 1 Table 7 1 Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode Setting Observed Frequency 300 kHz 1 3 to 6 3 MHz 30 MHz 31 to 36 MHz 40 MHz 41 to 46 MHz DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 7 3 21 106 15 13 5 The signal observed on an oscilloscope should be as solid as the signal in Figure 7 4 Figure WAVE7 here Figure 7 4 Waveform Integrity in SRC Tune Mode 6 The signal observed on the spectrum analyzer will appear jittery a
36. Processor Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 45 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A20 Disk Drive Tools Required T 8 TORX screwdriver T 10 TORX screwdriver T 15 TORX screwdriver small slot screwdriver ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the bottom cover refer to Covers in this chapter Remove the front panel refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter Turn the instrument upside down and disconnect the ribbon cable W37 from the CPU board A9J15 Remove the two screws item 1 that secure the disk drive deck to the bottom edge of the front frame Slide the disk drive deck out of the instrument Remove the four screws that secure the disk drive A20 to the deck Remove the drive from the deck Replacement Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note When replacing the disk drive deck ensure that the two tabs item 2 at the rear of the deck slide into the slots item 3 of the CPU board deck 14 46 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A20 Disk Drive Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 47 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver a T 15 TORX screwdriver m 9 16 inch hex nut driver a ESD electrostatic discharge ground
37. RF Output Power CC Test 47 Source Pretune CC Test 48 Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 47 EEPROM Backup Disk Internal Test 0 A10 Digital IF A9CC Jumper Positions Analog Bus CC Test 46 Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 53 ADC Linearity CC Test 52 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 EEPROM Backup Disk Receiver Noise Level Trace Noise Input Crosstalk Absolute Amplitude Accuracy or 1 If you have an EEPROM backup disk available you only need to perform the first three tests listed DRAFT 3 21 106 15 15 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 14 53 Table 14 1 Related Service Procedures 3 of 3 Replaced Assembly Adjustments Correction Constants CC Verification On Site Verification A11 Phase Lock A9CC Jumper Positions Analog Bus CC Test 46 Source Pretune CC Test 48 EEPROM Backup Disk Minimum R Level Frequency Accuracy or On Site Verification A12 Reference A9CC Jumper Positions High Low Band Transition Frequency Accuracy EEPROM Backup Disk Frequency Range and Accuracy A13 Fractional N Analog A9CC Jumper Positions Fractional N Spur and FM Sideband EEPROM Backup Disk Spectral Purity other spurious signals Frequency Range and Accuracy A14 Fractional N Digital A9CC Jumper Positions Fractional N Frequency Range EEPROM Backup Disk Frequency Range and Accuracy or On Site Verification A15 Prer
38. Source Output Power Level 10dBm 0 300 1 0 0 33 20 000 1 0 0 10 50 000 1 0 0 10 100 000 1 0 0 11 200 000 1 0 0 11 500 000 1 0 0 11 1 000 000 1 0 0 11 2 000 000 1 0 0 20 3 000 000 1 0 0 20 4 000 000 1 0 0 17 5 000 000 1 0 0 17 6 000 000 1 0 0 17 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 7 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 6 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 3 Receiver Minimum R Channel Level CW Frequency Specification Marker Value Measurement dB dB Uncertainty dB 300 kHz lt 35 1 0 3 29 MHz lt 35 1 0 3 31 MHz lt 35 1 0 15 90 MHz lt 35 1 0 16 10 MHz lt 35 1 0 30 90 MHz lt 35 1 0 31 10 MHz lt 35 1 0 1 6069 GHz lt 35 1 0 1 6071 GHz lt 35 1 0 3 000 GHz lt 35 2 0 4 000 GHz lt 30 2 0 5 000 GHz lt 30 2 0 6 000 GHz lt 30 2 0 2b 8 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 7 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 4 Receiver Minimum R Channel Level for External Source Mode CW Frequency Frac N VCO Frac N VCO Measured Value Measurement MHz L
39. Source Troubleshooting 7 25 3 21 106 15 13 A14 Divide by N Circuit Check Note The A13 assembly should still be out of the instrument and the A14 assembly on an extender board 1 Ground A14TP14 and confirm as in the A14 VCO Exercise that the VCO oscillates at approximately 50 to 55 MHz 2 Put the analyzer in CW mode to avoid relock transitions and activate the FRACN TUNE service mode 3 Connect an oscilloscope to A14J3 and observe the output 4 With the FRACN TUNE service feature vary the frequency from 30 MHz to 60 8 MHz 5 The period of the observed signal should vary from 5 5 us to 11 ps a If this procedure produces unexpected results the A14 assembly is faulty m If this procedure produces the expected results perform the A 14 to A13 Digital Control Signals Check 6 Remember to replace the A13 assembly A14 to A13 Digital Control Signals Check The A14 assembly generates a TTL cycle start CST signal every 10 microseconds If the VCO is oscillating and the CST signal is not detectable at A14TP3 the A14 assembly is non functional Use the CST signal as an external trigger for the oscilloscope and monitor the signals in Table 7 6 Since these TTL signals are generated by A14 to control A13 check them at A13 first Place A13 on the large extender board The signals should look similar to Figure 7 21 If these signals are good the A13 assembly is defective Table 7 6 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signa
40. Table 10 1 Test Status Terms Display Abbreviation Definition HP IB Code PASS PASS 0 FAIL FAIL 1 IP IN PROGRESS 2 NA NOT AVAILABLE 3 ND NOT DONE 4 DONE DONE 5 EXECUTE TEST EXET Runs the selected test and may display these softkeys CONTINUE TESR1 Continues the selected test YES TESR2 Alters correction constants during adjustment tests NEXT TESR4 Displays the next choice SELECT TESR6 Chooses the option indicated ABORT TESR8 Terminates the test and returns to the tests menu INTERNAL TESTS Evaluates the analyzer s internal operation These tests are completely internal and do not require external connections or user interaction EXTERNAL TESTS Evaluates the analyzer s external operation These additional tests require some user interaction such as keystrokes SYS VER TESTS Verifies the analyzer system operation by examining the contents of the measurement calibration arrays The procedure is in the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Information about the calibration arrays is provided in the Error Terms chapter ADJUSTMENT TESTS Generates and stores the correction constants For more information refer to the Adjustments chapter DISPLAY TESTS Checks for correct operation of the GSP board DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 3 3 21 106 15 14 Test Options Menu To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS T
41. a aaa 10 28 10 11 Analog Bus Node 16 2 a aa a 10 29 10 12 Counter Readout Location 2 a a a a o 10 30 10 13 Analog Bus Node 189 aoa aaa aaa 10 81 10 14 Analog Bus Node 23 a eee 10 38 10 15 Analog Bus Node 29 2 ww eee 10 36 10 16 Analog Bus Node 30 2 2 LU 10 17 Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display 10 39 Tables 10 1 Test Status Terms cc a 10 3 10 2 Descriptions of Jumper Positions 2 2 ee eee 10 6 Contents 2 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages Service Key Menus These menus allow you to perform the following service functions m test m verify m adjust m control a troubleshoot The menus are divided into two groups 1 Internal Diagnostics 2 Service Features When applicable the HP IB mnemonic is written in parentheses following the key See HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions at the end of this section Error Messages The displayed messages that pertain to service functions are also listed in this chapter to help you Understand the message m Solve the problem DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 1 3 21 106 15 14 Service Key Menus Internal Diagnostics The internal diagnostics menus are shown in Figure 10 1 and described in the following paragraphs The following keys access the internal diagnostics menus m TESTS m TEST OPTIONS m SELF DIAGNOSE Figure INTDIAG here Figure 10
42. all on There are nine green LEDs one is not visible without removing the PC board stabilizer s If all of the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are on there is a 95 confidence level that the power supply is verified To confirm the last 5 uncertainty of the power supply refer to Measure the Post Regulator Voltages next a If any LED on the A8 post regulator is off or flashing refer to If the Green LEDs on A8 are not All ON in this procedure Measure the Post Regulator Voltages Measure the DC voltages on the test points of A8 with a voltmeter Refer to Figure 5 3 for test point locations and Table 5 1 for supply voltages and limits 5 4 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Figure TPL5 here Figure 5 3 A8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations Table 5 1 A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages TP Supply Range 1 65 V 64 6 to 65 4 2 AGND n a 3 5 VD 4 9 to 5 3 4 SDIS n a 5 15 V 14 4 to 15 6 6 12 6VPP probe power 12 1 to 12 8 7 15 V 14 5 to 15 5 8 5 VU 5 05 to 5 35 9 5 2 V 5 0 to 5 4 10 22 V 21 3 to 22 7 11 6 V 5 8 to 6 2 DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 5 3 21 106 15 12 If the Green LED on A15 is not ON Steadily If the green LED is not on steadily the line voltage is not sufficient to power the analyzer Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse Check the main power line cord line fuse line
43. are characterized by measuring the reflection S11 522 responses of a thru configuration during the calibration procedure Significant System Components a thru cable m cable connectors m test port connectors Affected Measurements All transmission and reflection measurements of a low insertion loss two port devices are most affected by load match errors Transmission measurements of lossy devices are also affected DRAFT Error Terms 11 11 3 21 106 15 14 Figure ELFELR here Figure 11 6 Typical ELF ELR Transmission Tracking ETF and ETR Description Transmission tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path including R input and the transmission test path including A or B input while measuring transmission The response of the test port cables is included These terms are characterized by measuring the transmission 521 512 of the thru configuration during the error correction procedure Significant System Components a R signal path if both ETF and ETR and bad A or B input paths a thru cable Affected Measurements All transmission measurements are affected by transmission tracking errors 11 12 Error Terms DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Figure ETFETR here Figure 11 7 Typical ETF ETR DRAFT Error Terms 11 13 3 21 106 15 14 Contents 12 Theory of Operation How the HP 8753D Option 011 Works The Built In Synthesized Source Test Sets T
44. bus nodes perform step All below Then follow the node specific instructions Step All Press PRESET MEAS ANALOG IN MARKER SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON FORMAT MORE REAL Node 13 VCO Tune 2 not used Node 14 Vbb Ref ECL reference voltage level Perform step All above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 14 GI SCALE REF 3 1 REFERENCE VALUE 129 1 The trace should be within 0 3 V one division of the reference value Vbb Ref is used to compensate for ECL voltage drift DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 27 3 21 106 15 14 Node 15 Pretune open loop source pretune voltage Perform step All above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 15 x1 SCALE REF AUTOSCALE This node displays the source pretune signal and should look like a stair stepped ramp Each step corresponds to the start of a band Disregard the error message CAUTION POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK Figure NODE15 here Figure 10 10 Analog Bus Node 15 10 28 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Node 16 1V GHz source oscillator tuning voltage Perform step All above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 16 x1 SCALE REF AUTOSCALE This node displays the tuning voltage ramp used to tune the source oscillator You should see a voltage ramp like the one shown in Figure 10 11 If this waveform is correct you can be confident that the All phase lock assembly the A3 source assembly the A13 A14 fra
45. but not a controller to the analyzer one at a time and check their functionality Any problems observed are in the peripherals cables or are address problems see above Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers Passing the preceding checks indicates that the analyzer s peripheral functions are normal Therefore if the analyzer has not been operating properly with an external controller suspect the controller Check the following Compatibility must be HP 9000 series 200 300 See Chapter 1 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options HP IB interface hardware must be installed Refer to the manual Installing and Maintaining HP Basic WS 6 2 that comes with your HP Basic software Select code Refer to the manual Installing and Maintaining HP Basic WS 6 2 that comes with your HP Basic software I O and HP IB binaries loaded Refer to the manual Installing and Maintaining HP Basic WS 6 2 that comes with your HP Basic software HP IB cables See HP IB Requirements in the HP 8753D Network Analyzer User s Guide Programming syntax Refer to the HP 8753D Network Analyzer Programmer s Guide If the analyzer appears to be operating unexpectedly but has not completely failed go to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 7 3 21 106 15 12 Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Use the following procedures only if you have read the previous sections in this chapter and you t
46. cable 24 inch 2 ccc ccc eee cren HP 11500B Non metallic adjustment tool lt s HP P N 8830 0024 TORX screwdriver T 15 Antistatic wrist strap 6 ccc cee cece cece ence nen sara HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap cord 00 0 cece cece ence eee ne ne nes HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire 0 0 0 HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment sets the VCXO voltage controlled crystal oscillator frequency to maintain the instrument s frequency accuracy 1 Remove the upper rear bumpers and analyzer top cover using the torx screwdriver 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 18 Figure FREQACC here Figure 3 18 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Setup Note Make sure that the spectrum analyzer and network analyzer references are NOT connected 3 For Option 1D5 Instruments Only Remove the BNC to BNC jumper that is connected between the EXT REF and the 10 MHz Precision Reference as shown in Figure 3 20 4 Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows Center Frequency 2 9 GHz or 5 9 GHz for Option 006 Frequency Span 50 kHz Reference Level 10 dBm DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 45 3 21 106 15 11 5 On the HP 8753D Option 011 press PRESET MENU CW FREQ 2 9 G n or 5 9 G n for Option 006 6 No adjustment is required when the spectrum analyzer measures 2 9 GHz 5 kHz or 5 9 GHz
47. ee ee ee 12 20 The Sampler Circuit in High Band 12 20 The Sampler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band A 12 20 The 2nd LO Signal 2 ee 12221 The Mixer Circuit 2 2 12 21 A10 Digital IF 2 ee ee 12 21 Index Contents 2 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Figures 12 1 Simplified Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System 12 2 12 2 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram 12 4 12 3 Digital Control Group Simplified Block Diagram 12 7 12 4 Low Band Operation of the Source o 12 12 12 5 High Band Operation of the Source 12 14 12 6 Harmonic Analysis o 12 16 12 7 External Source Mode 12 17 12 8 Tuned Receiver Mode 12 17 12 9 Simplified Block Diagrams of the Test Sets 12 19 12 10 Receiver Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram 12 20 Tables 12 1 Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies 12 11 12 2 Low Band Subsweep Frequencies 12 12 12 3 High Band Subsweep Frequencies 12 15 12 4 Mixer Frequencies Loe 12 21 DRAFT Contents 3 3 21 106 15 14 12 Theory of Operation This chapter is divided into two major sections m How the HP 8753D Option 011 Works gives a general description of the HP 8753D Network Analyzer s operation m A Close Look at the Analyzer s Functional Groups provides more detailed operating theory for each of the analyzer s functional groups How the HP 8753D Option 011 Works Network analyzers measure the reflection and transmission characterist
48. error correction calibration m test port connectors m test port cables DRAFT Error Terms 11 7 3 21 106 15 14 Affected Measurements Low reflection device measurements are most affected by directivity errors Figure EDFEDR here Figure 11 2 Typical EDF EDR without and with Cables Source Match ESF and ESR Description Source match is a measure of test port connector match as well as the match between all components from the source to the test port These are the forward and reverse uncorrected source match terms of the driven port Significant System Components load calibration kit device open calibration kit device short calibration kit device bridge test port connectors bias tees step attenuator transfer switch test port cables Affected Measurements Reflection and transmission measurements of highly reflective devices are most affected by source match errors 11 8 Error Terms DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Figure ESFESR here Figure 11 3 Typical ESF ESR without and with Cables Reflection Tracking ERF and ERR Description Reflection tracking is the difference between the frequency response of the reference path R path and the frequency response of the reflection test path A or B input path Significant System Components m open calibration kit device m short calibration kit device a R signal path if large variation in both ERF and ERR a A or B input paths if only one term is affected Affecte
49. filter you need to distinguish between only two spurs each of which should be 10 dB to 20 dB 3 to 4 divisions above the trace noise Without the filter you need to distinguish the target spur between four or five spurs each of which may be 0 002 to 0 010 dB invisible to 2 divisions above or below the trace noise Perform the first five steps of the procedure at least once for familiarization before trying to select the target spur especially if you are not using a filter DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 27 3 21 106 15 11 1 Connect the equipment shown in Figure 3 10 Figure CAVOSC here Figure 3 10 Setup for Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constant Routine 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 54 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES During this adjustment routine you will see several softkeys CONTINUE Sweeps the current frequency span you may press it repeatedly for additional sweeps of the current frequency span NEXT Sweeps the next frequency span 2 MHz higher SELECT Enters the value of the marker which you have placed on the spur and exits the routine ABORT Exits the routine 3 Press CONTINUE to sweep the first frequency span three times Each new span overlaps the previous span by 3 MHz the center frequency increases by 2 MHz the span is 5 MHz Therefore anything visible on the right half of the screen of one set of sweeps will appear on the left half or center of the screen when you
50. listed in Table 5 3 one at a time and in the order shown The assemblies are sorted from most to least accessible Table 5 3 also lists any associated assemblies that are supplied by the assembly that is being removed After each assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15 Note m Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting assemblies m When extensive disassembly is required refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures m Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts to identify specific cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter m If the red LED goes out the particular assembly or one receiving power from it that allows it to go out is faulty a If the red LED is still on after you have checked all of the assemblies listed in Table 5 3 continue to Check the Operating Temperature Table 5 3 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection Assembly Removal or Other Assemblies that Receive To Remove Disconnection Method Power from the Removed Assembly 1 A19 Graphics Processor Disconnect W14 A18 Display 2 A14 Frac N Digital Remove from Card Cage None 3 A9 CPU Disconnect W36 A20 Disk Drive 4 A16 Rear Panel Interface Disconnect W27 None 5 A2 Front Panel Interface Disconnect W17 A1 Front Panel Keyboard DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 9 3 21 106 15 12 Check the Opera
51. locked loop problems MORE Accesses the service modes more menu listed below 10 14 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Service Modes More Menu To access this menu press SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR ON off SM6 IF GAIN AUTO IF GAIN ON IF GAIN OFF SPUR TEST on OFF SM7 STORE EEPR on OFF SPUR AVOID ON off SM8 ANALOG BUS on OFF ANAB DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Toggles the sampler correction ON for normal operation or OFF for diagnosis or adjustment purposes Normal operating condition and works in conjunction with IF GAIN ON and OFF The A10 assembly includes a switchable attenuator section and an amplifier that amplifies low level 4 kHz IF signals for A and B inputs only This mode allows the A10 IF section to automatically determine if the attenuator should be switched in or out The switch occurs when the A or B input signal is approximately 30 dBm Locks out the A10 IF attenuator sections for checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits regardless of the amplitude of the or B IF signal Switches out both the A and B attenuation circuits they cannot be switched independently Be aware that input signal levels above 30 dBm at the sampler input will saturate the ADC and cause measurement errors Switches in both of the A10 IF attenuators for checking the A10 IF gain amplifier circuits Small input signals will appear noisy and raise the apparent noise fl
52. measuring capability the analyzer is phase locked to a highly stable crystal oscillator For this purpose a portion of the transmitted signal is routed to the R channel input of the receiver where it is sampled by the phase detection loop and fed back to the source Test Sets Signal separation for the HP 8753D Option 011 network analyzer can be accomplished using any one of the following accessories s HP 85044A B Transmission Reflection Test Set s HP 85046A B S Parameter Test Set HP 85047A S Parameter Test Set HP Made Special Option Transmission Reflection or S Parameter Test Set m HP 862054 86207A RF Bridge HP 116674 Two Way Power Splitter and HP 86205A RF Bridge Signal separation devices are needed to separate the incident signal from the transmitted reflected signal The incident signal which comes from the analyzer s source RF output is applied to the R channel receiver input Meanwhile the transmitted reflected signal is applied to the A or B channel receiver input via a test port coupler in a test set or an RF bridge 12 2 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 The HP 85046A B and HP 85047A S parameter test sets contain the hardware required to make simultaneous transmission and reflection measurements in both the forward and reverse directions An RF path switch in the test set allows reverse measurements to be made without changing the connections to the device under test Test Set Step Attenuator
53. not conform to the Logical Interchange Format LIF You must initialize the disk before reading or writing to it 10 50 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Contents 11 Error Terms Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnostic Purpose Full Two Port Error Correction Procedure Error Term Inspection If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values Uncorrected Performance Error Term Descriptions Directivity EDF and EDR Description Significant System Components Affected Measurements Source Match ESF and ESR Description Significant System Components Affected Measurements Reflection Tracking ERF and PRR Description Significant System Components Affected Measurements Isolation Crosstalk EXF and EXR Description Significant System Components Affected Measurements Load Match ELF and ELR Description Significant System Components Affected Measurements Transmission Tracking ETF and ETR Description o Significant System Components Affected Measurements Index DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 11 1 11 2 11 6 11 6 11 6 11 7 11 7 11 7 11 7 11 8 11 8 11 8 11 8 11 8 11 9 11 9 11 9 11 9 11 10 11 10 11 10 11 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 Contents 1 Figures 11 1 Standard Connections for Full Two Port Error Correction 11 3 11 2 Typical EDF EDR without and with Cables 2 a a a a a 0 11 8 11 3 Typica
54. pattern until PRESET is pressed 60 DRAM cell Tests the DRAM on A19 by writing a test pattern to the DRAM and then verifying that it can be read back 61 Main VRAM Tests the VRAM by writing all zeros to one location in each bank and then writing all ones to one location in each bank Finally a walking one pattern is written to one location in each bank 62 VRAM bank Tests all the cells in each of the 4 VRAM banks 63 VRAM video Verifies that the GSP is able to successfully perform both write and read shift register transfers It also checks the video signals LASYNC LVSYNC and LBLANK to verify that they are active and toggling 64 RGB outputs Confirms that the analog video signals are correct and it verifies their functionality 65 Inten DAC Verifies that the intensity DAC can be set both low and high 10 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Test Patterns Test patterns are used in the factory for display adjustments diagnostics and troubleshooting but they are not used for field service Test patterns are executed by entering the test number 66 through 80 then pressing EXECUTE TEST CONTINUE The test pattern will be displayed and the softkey labels blanked To exit the test pattern and return the softkey labels press softkey 8 bottom softkey The following is a description of the test patterns 66 67 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 TT DRAFT 3 21 106 Test pat 1 Displays an
55. press and re enter the correct value d Press DONE to complete the data entry for each point Note The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu SEGMENT Allows you to select a frequency point EDIT Allows you to edit or change a previously entered value DELETE Allows you to delete a point from the sensor cal factor table ADD Allows you to add a point into the sensor cal factor table CLEAR LIST Allows you to erase the entire sensor cal factor table DONE Allows you to complete the points entry of the sensor cal factor table 3 10 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 8 For Option 006 Instruments Only Press CAL FACTOR SENSOR B to create a power sensor calibration table for power sensor B HP 8481A using the softkeys mentioned above Since sensor B is only used for 3 GHz to 6 GHz measurements you only need to input calibration factors for this frequency range 9 Preset zero and calibrate the power meter and the HP 8482A power sensor 10 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 2 Figure SETUPA here Figure 3 2 Setup A for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants 11 Press MENU CW FREQ 300 k m DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 11 3 21 106 15 11 12 Record the power meter reading in the first column of Table 3 2 Table 3 2 Power Meter Readings Setup A Reading Setup B Reading Power Loss of 2 First Reading Second Readi
56. procedure a If the analyzer displays FAIL refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter 3 32 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Serial Number Correction Constant Test 55 Analyzer warm up time 5 minutes This procedure stores the analyzer serial number in the A9 CPU assembly EEPROMs Caution Perform this procedure ONLY if the A9 CPU assembly has been replaced 1 Record the ten character serial number that is on the analyzer real panel identification label 2 Press PRESET DISPLAY MORE TITLE ERASE TITLE to erase the HP logo 3 Enter the serial number by rotating the front panel knob to position the arrow below each character of the instrument serial number and then pressing SELECT LETTER to enter each letter Enter a total of ten characters four digits one letter and five final digits Press BACKSPACE if you made a mistake 4 Press DONE when you have finished entering the title Caution Mistakes CANNOT be corrected after step 5 is performed unless you contact the factory for a clear serial number keyword Then you must perform the Options Correction Constants procedure and repeat this procedure 5 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 55 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 33 3 21 106 15 11 6 Observe the analyzer for the results of the routine a If the analyzer displays the message Serial Cor DONE you have completed this procedur
57. removal procedure Note The fan should be installed so that the direction of the air flow is away from the instrument There is an arrow on the fan chassis indicating the air flow direction 14 50 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 B1 Fan Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 51 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Post Repair Procedures for HP 8753D Option 011 Table 14 1 lists the additional service procedures which you must perform to ensure that the instrument is working correctly following the replacement of an assembly Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table Table 14 1 Related Service Procedures Interface Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants CC Al Front Panel None Internal Test O Keyboard Internal Test 23 A2 Front Panel None Internal Test O Internal Test 23 A3 Source A9 CC Jumper Positions Source Def CC Test 44 Analog Bus CC Test 46 Source Pretune CC Test 48 RF Output Power CC Test 47 Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC Test 54 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking EEPROM Backup Disk Output Power Spectral Purity harmonics and mixer spurs or On Site Verification A4 A5 A6 Samplers A9CC Jumper Positions Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 53 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 EEPROM Backup Disk Minimum R Level if R sampler replaced Input Crosstalk
58. shows typical performance without error correction RF cables are not used except as noted Related error terms should be within these values 11 6 Error Terms DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Table 11 2 Uncorrected System Performance of HP 8753D 500 with 7 mm Test Ports Frequency Range 80 kHz to 800 kHz 800 kHz to 1 3 GHz 1 3 GHz to 3 GHz 3 GHz to 6 GHz Directivity 20 dB 35 dB 30 dB 25 dB Source Match 18 dB 16 dB 16 dB 14 dB Load Match 20 dB 18 dB 16 dB 14 dB Reflection Tracking 2 0 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB Transmission Tracking 2 0 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 2 5 dB Crosstalk 100 dB 100 dB 100 dB 90 dB Typical 15 dB 30 kHz to 50 kHz 10 dB 30 kHz to 50 kHz Error Term Descriptions The error term descriptions in this section include the following information m significance of each error term m typical results following a full 2 port error correction m guidelines to interpret each error term The same description applies to both the forward F and reverse R terms Directivity EDF and EDR Description Directivity is a measure of any detected power that is reflected when a load is attached to the test port These are the uncorrected forward and reverse directivity error terms of the system The directivity error of the test port is determined by measuring the reflection S11 522 of the load during the error correction procedure Significant System Components m load used in the
59. supplies are shut down due to excessive current draw These supplies are 15VPP and 12 6VPP both supplied by the A8 post regulator 15VPP is derived from the 15 V supply 12 6VPP is derived from the 12 6 V supply 5 16 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Refer to Figure 5 7 and carefully measure the power supply voltages at the front panel RF probe connectors Figure PROBES here Figure 5 7 Front Panel Probe Power Connector Voltages 1 Ifthe correct voltages are present troubleshoot the probe 2 If the voltages are not present check the 15 V and 12 6 V green LEDs on A8 m If the LEDs are on there is an open between the A8 assembly and the front panel probe power connectors Put A8 onto an extender board and measure the voltages at the following pins A8P2 pins 6 and 36 12 6 V A8P2 pins 4 and 34 15 V a If the LEDs are off continue with Check the Fuses and Isolate A8 DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 17 3 21 106 15 12 Check the Fuses and Isolate A8 Check the fuses associated with each of these supplies near the A8 test points If these fuses keep burning out a short exists Try isolating A8 by removing it from the motherboard connector but keeping the cable A15W1 connected to A8J2 Connect a jumper wire from A8TP2 to chassis ground m If either the 15 V or 12 6 V fuse blows or the associated green LEDs do not light replace A8 m Ifthe 15 V and 12 6 V green LEDs li
60. through a pretune acquire track sequence to achieve phase lock In external source mode the fractional N VCO pretunes as a closed loop synthesizer referenced to the 100 kHz signal from the A12 reference assembly Then to acquire or track a switch causes the VCO to be tuned by the All phase lock assembly instead Refer to the Overall Block Diagram at the end of Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here 12 16 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Figure EXBLK12 here Figure 12 7 External Source Mode Tuned Receiver Mode In tuned receiver mode the analyzer is a synthesized swept narrow band receiver only The external signal source must be synthesized and reference locked to the analyzer To achieve this the analyzer s source and phase lock circuits are completely unused See Figure 12 8 The fractional N synthesizer is tuned so that one of its harmonics 1st LO down converts the RF input to the samplers In contrast to external source mode the analyzer does not phase lock at all However the 1st LO is synthesized The analyzer can function as a swept tuned receiver similar to a spectrum analyzer but the samplers create spurious signals at certain frequencies which limit the accuracy of such measurements Figure TRBLK12 here Figure 12 8 Tuned Receiver Mode DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 17 3 21 106 15 14 Signal Separation External Test Sets The HP 85047A S parameter test set contains a switched fre
61. time determines the magnitude and location of each discontinuity Displaying the transmission coefficient of a network versus time determines the characteristics of individual transmission paths Time domain operation retains all accuracy inherent with the correction that is active in of such devices as SAW filters SAW delay lines RF cables and RF antennas Option 1CM Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount the instrument with handles detached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches horizontal spacing Option 1CP Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles This option is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack with 482 6 mm 19 inches spacing DRAFT Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 7 3 21 106 15 06 Service and Support Options The analyzer automatically includes a one year on site service warranty where available If on site service is not available in your local area you can purchase the analyzer with a W08 Option which converts the one year on site warranty to a three year return to HP warranty Consult your local HP customer engineer for details The following service and support options are available at the time you purchase an HP 8753D Option 011 network analyzer Option W31 This option adds two years of on site repai
62. you have finished entering the title Caution Do not confuse I with 1 or O with 0 zero 5 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 56 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES 6 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays Option Cor DONE you have completed this procedure a If the analyzer has more than one option repeat steps 2 through 6 to install the remaining option s m If the analyzer displays Option Cor FAIL check the keyword used in step 3 and make sure it is correct Pay special attention to the letters I or 0 the numbers 1 or 0 zero Repeat this entire adjustment test m If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine contact your nearest HP service office DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 35 3 21 106 15 11 Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants Test 57 This internal adjustment test writes default calibration kit definitions device model coefficients into EEPROM s 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 57 lt 1 EXECUTE TEST YES 2 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays Cal Kit Def DONE press PRESET and you have completed this procedure m If the analyzer does not display DONE contact your nearest HP Sales and Service office 3 36 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Initialize EEPROMs Test 58 This ser
63. 0 Type N P N 8120 4781 P RF Cable 50 Type N m to Type N m 11500B A RF Cable 50 7 mm 24 inch matched 11857D P HP IB Cable 10833A B C D A P BNC Cable P N 8120 1840 A P Adapter Type N f to Type N f P N 1250 1472 A P Adapter Type N m to Type N m P N 1250 1475 A P Adapter Type N f to APC 7 11524A P Adapter Type N m to APC 7 11525A P Adapter APC 3 5 f to Type N f P N 1250 1745 P Adapter APC 3 5 m to APC 7 P N 1250 1746 P Adapter Type N f to BNC m P N 1250 0077 P Adapter BNC to Alligator Clip P N 8120 1292 A DRAFT Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 3 3 21 106 15 06 Table 1 2 Service Test Equipment 3 of 3 Required Critical Recommended Use Equipment Specifications Model Power Splitter 2 Way Frequency 300 kHz 6 GHz HP 11667A A P Option 001 Power Splitter 3 Way Frequency 300 kHz 3 GHz Tracking between HP 11850C P T outputs 25 dB Output SWR 1 1 dB Low Pass Filter gt 50 dB 2 96 Hz and passband that includes HP P N 9135 0198 A 800 MHz Termination 50 Type N m Return loss gt 30 dB HP 908A P Anti static Wrist Strap HP P N 9300 1367 A P T Anti static Wrist Strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 A P T Static control Table Mat and Earth HP P N 9300 0797 A P T Ground Wire P Performance Tests A Adjustment T Troubleshooting 1 4 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options DRAFT 3 21 106 15 06 Principles of Microwave Connector Care Proper connect
64. 06 15 12 Digital Control Observe the Power Up Sequence Switch the analyzer power off then on The following should take place within a few seconds 1 On the front panel observe the following a All six amber LEDs illuminate a The amber LEDs go off after a few seconds except the CH 1 LED See Figure 4 5 2 The display should come up bright and focused 3 Four red LEDs on the A9 CPU board should illuminate They can be observed through a small opening in the rear panel Figure FPPUS4 here Figure 4 5 Front Panel Power Up Sequence Verify Internal Tests Passed 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS INTERNAL TESTS EXECUTE TEST The display should indicate TEST O ALL INT PASS a If your display shows the above message go to step 2 Otherwise continue with this step m If phase lock error messages are present this test may stop without passing or failing In this case continue with the next procedure to check the source 4 10 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 a If you have unexpected results or if the analyzer indicates a specific test failure that internal test and possibly others have failed the analyzer reports the first failure detected Refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting m If the analyzer indicates failure but does not identify the test press L to search for the failed test Then refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Likewise if
65. 06 15 15 A2 Front Panel Interface Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 23 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A3 Source Assembly Tools Required a T 15 TORX screwdriver m 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in 1b a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover refer to Covers in this chapter 2 Remove the source bracket item 1 3 Disconnect the semi rigid cable W1 from the source assembly A3 If you have Option 006 remove the flexible cable W26 from the source as well 4 Lift the two retention clips item 2 at the front and rear of the source assembly A3 to an upright position 5 The source is seated in a motherboard edge connector Hold the loose semi rigid cable W1 to the right and lift up on the source bracket handle item 3 to remove the source assembly from the instrument Replacement 1 Slide the edges of the sheet metal partition item 4 into the guides at the front and back of the source compartment Press down on the module to ensure that it is well seated in the motherboard connector Push down the retention clips Reconnect the semi rigid cable W1 to the source assembly If you have Option 006 reconnect the flexible cable W26 to the source as well Note When reconnecting semi rigid cables it is recommended that the connections be torqued to 10 in lb 14 24 Ass
66. 1 Internal Diagnostics Menus Note Throughout this service guide these conventions are observed m HARDKEYS are labeled front panel keys m SOFTKEYS display defined keys in the menus a HP IB COMMANDS When applicable follow the keystroke in parentheses Tests Menu To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS TESTS TEST D Accesses a menu that allows you to select or execute the service tests The default is set to internal test 1 Note Descriptions of tests in each of the categories are given under the heading Test Descriptions in the following pages The tests are divided by function into the following categories m Internal Tests 1 20 a External Tests 21 26 m System Verification Tests 27 43 10 2 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 m Adjustment Tests 44 57 m Display Tests 59 65 To access the first test in each category press the category softkey To access the other tests use the numeric keypad step keys or front panel knob The test number name and status abbreviation will be displayed in the active entry area of the display Table 10 1 shows the test status abbreviation that appears on the display its definition and the equivalent HP IB code The HP IB command to output the test status of the most recently executed test is OUTPTESS For more information refer to HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions located at the end of this chapter
67. 100 Hz Center Frequency 676 145105 MHz Span 2 5 kHz 4 On the HP 8753D Option 011 press PRESET MENU CW FREQ 676 045105 M74 5 Remove the upper rear corner bumpers and the top cover using a torx screwdriver 6 Adjust the 100 kHz R77 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer The minimum signal may or may not drop down into the noise floor DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 51 3 21 106 15 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Figure API here Figure 3 24 Location of API and 100 kHz Adjustments On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 676 051105 MHz On the HP 8753D Option 011 press MENU CW FREQ 676 048105 M74 Adjust the APH R35 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer 10 11 On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 676 007515 MHz On the HP 8753D Option 011 press MENU CW FREQ 676 004515 M74 Adjust the API2 R43 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 676 003450 MHz On the HP 8753D Option 011 press MENU CW FREQ 676 00045 M74 Adjust the API3 R45 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer On the spectrum analyzer set the center frequency for 676 003045 MHz On the HP 8753D Option 011 press MENU CW FREQ 676 000045 M 4t Adjust the API4 R47 for a null minimum amplitude on the spectrum analyzer 3 52 Adjustmen
68. 11P1 3 33 Figure 7 27 Aids YO COIL in setting YIG Press PRESET MENU NUMBER OF POINTS B Ga to observe this signal REF I A11TP9 Figure 7 9 Observe both low band and high band CW frequencies Figure 7 10 YO COIL o A11P1 2 32 Figure 7 7 Use SOURCE PLL OFF YO COIL o A11P1 1 31 Figure 7 7 1ST IF I A11 PL IF IN Figure 7 26 Check for 1 MHz with tee a All jack not at cable end in high band 7 32 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Figure FMCOIL7 here Figure 7 27 FM Coil Plot with 3 Point Sweep 4 If any of the input signals are not proper refer to the overall block diagram in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here as an aid to trouble shooting the problem to its source 5 If any of the output signals are not proper the All assembly is faulty DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 33 3 21 106 15 13 Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus The analog bus can perform a variety of fast checks However it too is subject to failure and thus should be tested prior to use You should have done this in Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here To use the analog bus to check any one of the nodes press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS IN Then press MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input and enter the analog bus node number followed by x1 Refer to Analog Bus in Chapter 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages for addition
69. 12 9b shows a simplified block diagram of the HP 85046A B The HP 85044A B transmission reflection test set contains a power splitter to divert a portion of the incident signal to the R input of the analyzer The remainder of the incident signal is routed through a directional bridge to the measurement port The test set includes a manually controlled 70 dB step attenuator and a bias tee for external biasing of active devices connected to the test port A simplified block diagram of the HP 85044A B is shown in Figure 12 9c An HP 11850C D or 11667A power splitter can be used instead of a test set for transmission measurements only 12 18 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Figure TSBLK12 here Figure 12 9 Simplified Block Diagrams of the Test Sets Receiver Theory The receiver functional group consists of the following assemblies m A4 sampler mixer m A5 sampler mixer m A6 sampler mixer m A10 digital IF These assemblies combine with the A9 CPU described in Digital Control Theory to measure and process input signals into digital information for display on the analyzer Figure 12 10 is a simplified block diagram of the receiver functional group The A12 reference assembly is also included in the illustration to show how the 2nd LO signal is derived DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 19 3 21 106 15 14 Figure RFGBLK12 here Figure 12 10 Receiver Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram A4 A5 A6 Sampler Mixer The A
70. 1475 Adapter type N f to type N f oo cece cece rea HP P N 1250 1472 Antistatic wrist strap 6 eee eee sereia HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire ss HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment procedure corrects the overall flatness of the microwave components that make up the analyzer receiver and test separation sections This is necessary for the HP 8753D Option 011 to meet the published test port flatness 1 If you just completed Source Correction Constants Test 47 continue this procedure with step 8 2 Press PRESET LOCAL SYSTEM CONTROLLER 3 Press LOCAL SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS P MTR HPIB The default power meter address is 13 Refer to the power meter manual as required to observe or change its HP IB address 4 Press POWER MTR 438A 437 to toggle between the 438A 437 and 436A power meters Choose the appropriate model number Note If you are using the HP 438A power meter connect the HP 8482A power sensor to channel A and for Option 006 connect the HP 8481A power sensor to channel B 3 22 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry 5 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR A to access the calibration factor menu for power sensor A HP 8482A 6 Build a table of up to twelve points twelve frequencies with
71. 16 X1 FORMAT MORE REAL SCALE REF AUTOSCALE This keystroke sequence lets you check the pretune DAC and the All output to the YO coil drive by monitoring the 1 V GHz signal at analog bus node 16 3 Compare the waveform to Figure 7 6 If the waveform is incorrect the A11 phase lock assembly is faulty Figure ABN7 here Figure 7 6 1V GHz at Analog Bus Node 16 with Source PLL Off 7 10 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope Note Use the large extender board for easy access to the voltage points The extender board is included with the HP 8753 Tool Kit See Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts for part numbers and ordering information 1 Connect oscilloscope probes to A11P1 1 and A11P1 2 The YO coil drive signal is actually two signals whose voltage difference drives the coil 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SOURCE PLL OFF to operate the analyzer in a swept open loop mode 3 Monitor the two YO coil drive lines In source tune mode the voltage difference should vary from approximately 3 5 to 5 0 volts as shown in Figure 7 7 m If the voltages are not correct replace the faulty A11 assembly a If the output signals from the All assembly are correct replace the faulty A3 source assembly m If neither the All nor the A3 assembly is faulty continue with the next check Figure VDIFF7 here Figure 7 7 YO and YO Coil Drive Voltage Differences
72. 17 dB 16 MHz 48 MHz 1 t 0 17 dB 31 MHz 62 MHz 1 t 0 17 dB 31 MHz 93 MHz 1 t 0 17 dB 61 MHz 122 MHz 1 0 17 dB 61 MHz 183 MHz 1 0 17 dB 121 MHz 242 MHz 1 0 17 dB 121 MHz 363 MHz 1 0 17 dB 180 MHz 360 MHz 1 0 17 dB 180 MHz 540 MHz 1 0 17 dB 310 MHz 620 MHz 1 0 17 dB 310 MHz 930 MHz 1 0 17 dB 700 MHz 1 4 GHz 1 0 17 dB 700 MHz 2 1 GHz 1 0 17 dB 1 GHz 2 GHz 1 0 17 dB 1 GHz 3 GHz 1 0 17 dB 1 5 GHz 3 GHz 1 0 17 dB DRAFT Performance Test Record 2a 19 Contents 2b Performance Test Record For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 30 kHz to 6 GHz 2b 1 DRAFT Contents 1 3 21 106 15 21 2b Performance Test Record For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 30 kHz to 6 GHz Note See the previous Performance Test Record section if your analyzer frequency range is from 300 kHz to 3 GHz DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 1 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 1 of 18 Calibration Lab Address Report Number Date Last Calibration Date Customer s Name Performed by Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006 Serial No Option s Firmware Revision Ambient Temperature C Relative Humidity H Test Equipment Used Description Model Number Trace Number Cal Due Date Frequency Counter Power Meter Power Sensor Calibration Kit Verification Kit Notes Comments 2b 2 Performance Te
73. 2 Japan 81 426 60 2111 Canada Hewlett Packard Canada Ltd 17500 South Service Road Trans Canada Highway Kirkland Quebec H9J 2X8 Canada 514 697 4232 Singapore Hewlett Packard Singapore Pte Ltd 150 Beach Road 29 00 Gateway West Singapore 0718 65 291 9088 Shipment for Service If you are sending the instrument to Hewlett Packard for service ship the analyzer to the nearest HP service center for repair including a description of any failed test and any error message Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable anti static packaging materials A listing of Hewlett Packard sales and service offices is provided in Table 15 1 15 4 Safety and Licensing 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 15 Safety Symbols The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument Caution Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Warning Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Instrument
74. 3 Figure 8 4 L ENDIF L enable digital IF P2 17 A9P2 17 Figure 8 5 L INTCOP L interrupt DSP P2 2 A10P2 2 Figure 8 5 Check for TTL activity 8 6 Receiver Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Figure DATALS here Figure 8 4 Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger Figure CNTRLS8 here Figure 8 5 Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger DRAFT Receiver Troubleshooting 8 7 3 21 106 15 13 Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good Since at least one input is good all of the common receiver circuitry beyond the multiplexer is functional Only the status of the individual sampler mixers and their individual signal paths is undetermined Check the 4 kHz Signal 1 Connect a cable from the RF OUT to input R 2 Press MENU CW FREQ 3 Use an oscilloscope to check the 4 kHz output of the sampler mixer in question at the A10 assembly The input and output access pins are listed in Table 8 2 The signal should resemble the waveform of Figure 8 6 m If the signal is good continue with Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants Off m If the signal is bad skip ahead to Check 1st LO Signal at Sampler Mixer Table 8 2 2nd IF 4 kHz Signal Locations Mnemonic Description A10 Location Signal Source IFR 4 kHz A10P1 1 31 A4P1 6 IFA 4 kHz A10P1 4 34 A5P1 6 IFB 4 kHz A10P1 7 37 A6P1 6 Figure IFWAVES here Figure 8 6 2nd IF 4 kHz Wav
75. 4 A5 and A6 sampler mixers all down convert the RF input signals to fixed 4 kHz 2nd IF signals with amplitude and phase corresponding to the RF input The Sampler Circuit in High Band In high band operation the sampling rate of the samplers is controlled by the 1st LO from the A7 pulse generator assembly The 1st LO is a comb of harmonics produced by a step recovery diode driven by the fractional N VCO fundamental signal One of the harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start frequency set at the front panel The 1st LO is combined in the samplers with the RF input signal from the source In the Option 006 samplers are additionally capable of recognizing RF input signals from 3 to 6 GHz The mixing products are filtered so that the only remaining response is the difference between the source frequency and the harmonic 1 MHz below it This fixed 1 MHz signal is the 1st IF Part of the 1st IF signal from the R sampler is fed back to the All phase lock assembly the RF output must be connected externally to the R input connector for phase locked operation The Sampler Circuit in Low Band or Super Low Band In low band or super low band Option 011 combined with Option 006 the sampler diodes are biased continuously on so that the RF input signal passes through them unchanged Thus the 1st IF is identical to the RF output signal from the source 300 kHz to 16 MHz for lowband 10 to 300 kHz for super lowband and sweeps with it Part of the Ist IF si
76. 4 48 14 48 14 48 14 50 14 50 14 50 14 50 14 52 DRAFT 15 15 Tables 14 1 Related Service Procedures Lcclll a 14 52 DRAFT Contents 3 3 21 106 15 15 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures This chapter contains procedures for removing and replacing the major assemblies of the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer A table showing the corresponding post repair procedures for each replaced assembly is located at the end of this chapter DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 1 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Replacing an assembly The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Warning These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any serv
77. 482A sensor A from the power splitter and replacing it with the HP 8481A sensor B a If you are using the HP 438A power meter the HP 8481A should be connected to the meter s channel B input a If you are using the HP 437B power meter zero and calibrate the HP 8481A sensor Subtract the value of each frequency in the second column from the value in the first column and enter the difference in the third column Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS SENSR LISTS POWER LOSS and enter the power loss data in the same way you entered the calibration factors Source Correction Routine 21 22 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 47 1 EXECUTE TEST YES Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 4 using splitter 2 and the power sensor requested by the prompt Figure SETUPC here Figure 3 4 Setup C for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 13 3 21 106 15 11 23 24 Press CONTINUE Observe the analyzer display for the results of the adjustment routine m If the analyzer shows SOURCE Cor DONE press PRESET and you have completed this procedure m If the analyzer fails this routine refer to Source Troubleshooting 3 14 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This procedure generates pretune values for correct phase loc
78. 6 15 13 Figure HO257 here Figure 7 18 25 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 Figure HO607 here Figure 7 19 60 MHz HI OUT Waveform from A14J1 A14 VCO Exercise The nominal tuning voltage range of the VCO is 10 to 5 volts When the analyzer is in operation this voltage is supplied by the A13 assembly This procedure substitutes a power supply for the A13 assembly to check the frequency range of the Al4 VCO 1 Switch off the analyzer and remove the A13 assembly 2 Put the Al4 assembly on an extender board and switch on the instrument 3 Prepare to monitor the VCO frequency either by m Activating the analog bus and setting the internal counter to the FR ACN node or 7 24 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 m Connecting an oscilloscope to A14J2 labeled LO OUT and looking for waveforms similar to Figure 7 20 Figure LOWAV27 here Figure 7 20 LO OUT Waveform at A14J2 4 Vary the voltage at Al4TP14 from 10 to 5 volts either by m Connecting an appropriate external power supply to Al4TP14 or a First jumping the 15 V internal power supply from A8TP8 to A14TP14 and then jumping the 5 2 V supply from ASTP10 to A14TP14 5 Confirm that the VCO frequency changes from approximately 30 MHz or less to 60 MHz or more 6 If this procedure produces unexpected results the A14 assembly is faulty 7 If this procedure produces the expected results continue with the A14 Divide by N Circuit Check DRAFT
79. AM with a battery providing at least 5 years of backup storage when external power is off Main RAM The main RAM random access memory is shared memory for the CPU and the digital signal processor It stores the raw data received from the digital signal processor while additional calculations are performed on it by the CPU The CPU reads the resulting formatted data from the main RAM and converts it to GSP commands It writes these commands to the GSP for output to the analyzer display EEPROM EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read only memory contains factory set correction constants unique to each instrument These constants correct for hardware variations to maintain the highest measurement accuracy The correction constants can be updated by executing the routines in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Digital Signal Processor The digital signal processor receives the digitized data from the A10 digital IF It computes discrete Fourier transforms to extract the complex phase and magnitude data from the 4 kHz IF signal The resulting raw data is written into the main RAM A18 Display The A18 display is a 7 5 inch raster scan CRT with associated drive circuitry It receives a 65 V power supply from the A19 GSP along with digital TTL horizontal and vertical sync signals and red green and blue RGB video signals Automatic degaussing is performed whenever the instrument is switched on to minimize the m
80. CO ADJ see Figure 3 16 with a non metallic tool so that the channel 1 marker is as many divisions above the reference line as the channel 2 marker is below it See Figure 3 17 Figure FNVCO here Figure 3 16 Location of the FN VCO Adjustment 3 42 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Figure RANGE here Figure 3 17 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Display DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 43 3 21 106 15 11 8 To fine tune this adjustment press PRESET MENU CW FREQ SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to set FRAC N TUNE to 29 2 MHz 9 Press S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 29 x1 MARKER FORMAT MORE REAL SCALE REF REFERENCE VALUE 7 a 10 Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment m If the marker value is less than 7 you have completed this procedure m If the marker value is greater than 7 readjust FN VCO ADJ to 7 Then perform steps 2 to 10 to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers are still above and below the reference line respectively a If you cannot adjust the analyzer correctly replace the A14 board assembly 3 44 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Required Equipment and Tools Spectrum analyzer 0 eee ee eee renan arara ra HP 8563E Power splitter ccc cece ccc cee nee ene reed HP 11667A Option 001 RF
81. DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 3 3 21 106 15 12 Step 2 Operator s Check This procedure verifies with 80 confidence that the analyzer is functioning properly Equipment 20 dB attenuator 0 0 ccc cnet eee nee eee e arara HP 8491A Option 020 RF cable set 2 eee nee e een e eee bene es HP 11851B Two way power splitter 0 0 ccc cence sorunu errr reren HP 11667A Option 001 Procedure 1 Switch on the analyzer for a 30 minute warm up 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 21 xi When TEST 21 R amp A Op Check appears on the analyzer display press EXECUTE TEST 4 4 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 3 At the prompt connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 2 with power to inputs R and A Press CONTINUE as prompted until the analyzer displays PASS or FAIL Figure OCS4 here Figure 4 2 Operator s Check Setup 4 Press 22 X1 to access the input R and B operator s check When the title appears press EXECUTE TEST Move the RF cable from input to B Press CONTINUE as prompted until the analyzer displays PASS or FAIL If the Operator s Check Failed m Recheck the equipment configuration and connections if necessary retest m Confirm that the attenuator splitter and cables meet their published specifications Visually inspect the connectors Retest or refer to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation as indicated Step 3 HP IB Systems Check Check the analyzer s HP
82. Disconnect the power cord Remove the four screws item 1 on the rear panel 1 2 3 Remove the bottom cover refer to Covers in this chapter 4 Remove the screw item 2 that secures the CPU board A9 to the deck Slide the board towards the front of the instrument so that it disconnects from the three standoffs item 3 Disconnect the four ribbon cables W37 W20 W35 and W36 from the CPU board A9 6 Lift the board off of the standoffs a Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 30 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A9 CPU Board Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 31 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A9BT1 Battery Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap m soldering iron with associated soldering tools Removal 1 Remove the A9 CPU board refer to A9 CPU Board in this chapter 2 Unsolder and remove A9BT1 from the A9 CPU board Warning Battery A9BT1 contains lithium Do not incinerate or puncture this battery Dispose of the discharged battery in a safe manner Replacement 1 Make sure the new battery is inserted into the A9 board with the correct polarity 2 Solder the battery into place 3 Replace the A9 CPU board refer to A9 CPU Board in this chapter 14 32 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 15
83. EST OPTIONS CONTINUE TEST TESR1 REPEAT on OFF TO2 RECORD on OFF TO1 LIMITS NORM SPCL POWER LOSS on OFF LOSS SENSR LISTS Accesses softkeys that affect the way tests routines run or supply necessary additional data Resumes the test from where it was stopped Toggles the repeat function on and off When the function is ON the selected test will run 10 000 times unless you press any key to stop it The analyzer shows the current number of passes and fails Toggles the record function on and off When the function is ON certain test results are sent to a printer via HP IB This is especially useful for correction constants The instrument must be in system controller mode or pass control mode to print Refer to the Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results chapter in the HP 8753D User s Guide Selects either NORMal or SPeCiaL tighter limits for the Operator s Check The SPCL limits are useful for a guard band Activates power loss function Accesses the power loss sensor lists menu USE SENSOR A B Selects the A or B power sensor calibration factor list for use in power meter calibration measurements CAL FACTOR SENSOR A CALFSENA Accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration data table for power sensor A CAL FACTOR SENSOR B CALFSENB Accesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the calibration data table for power sensor B POWER LOSS POWLLIST Ac
84. Errata Title amp Document Type 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer Service Guide Manual Part Number 08753 90406 Revision Date December 1997 HP References in this Manual This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett Packard Please note that Hewlett Packard s former test and measurement semiconductor products and chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies We have made no changes to this manual copy The HP XXXX referred to in this document is now the Agilent XXXX For example model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 86484 About this Manual We ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your product This manual provides the best information we could find It may be incomplete or contain dated information and the scan quality may not be ideal If we find a better copy in the future we will add it to the Agilent website Support for Your Product Agilent no longer sells or supports this product You will find any other available product information on the Agilent Test amp Measurement website www tm agilent com Search for the model number of this product and the resulting product page will guide you to any available information Our service centers may be able to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed but no other support from Agilent is available Agilent Technologies Service Guide HP 8753D Network Analyzer Option 011 HEWLETT
85. HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 14 Receiver Compression Phase CW Frequency Start Power Stop Power Measured Specification Measurement dBm dBm Value degrees Uncertainty degrees Channel A 50 MHz lt 5 2 N A 1 GHz lt 5 2 N A 2 GHz lt 5 2 N A 3 GHz lt 5 2 N A 4 GHz lt 5 2 N A 5 GHz lt 5 2 N A 6 GHz lt 5 2 N A Channel B 50 MHz lt 5 2 N A 1 GHz lt 5 2 N A 2 GHz lt 5 2 N A 3 GHz lt 5 2 N A 4 GHz lt 5 2 N A 5 GHz lt 5 2 N A 6 GHz lt 5 2 N A Channel R 50 MHz lt 5 2 N A 1 GHz lt 5 2 N A 2 GHz lt 5 2 N A 3 GHz lt 5 2 N A 4 GHz lt 5 2 N A 5 GHz lt 5 2 N A 6 GHz lt 5 2 N A 2b 18 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 17 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 15 Source and Receiver Harmonics Stop Frequency Harmonic Specification Measured Value Measurement GHz dBc Uncertainty dB Source Harmonics 3 2nd lt 25 1 2 3rd lt 25 1 Source and Receiver Harmonics 3 A 2nd lt 15 1 2 A 3rd lt 30 1 3 B 2nd lt 15 1 2 B 3rd lt 30 1 Receiver Harmonics 3 B 2nd lt 15 1 2 B 3rd lt 30 1 3 A 2nd lt 15 1 2 A 3rd lt 30 1 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 19 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record
86. IB functions with a known working passive peripheral such as a plotter printer or disk drive 1 Connect the peripheral to the analyzer using a good HP IB cable 2 Press LOCAL SYSTEM CONTROLLER to enable the analyzer to control the peripheral 3 Then press SET ADDRESSES and the appropriate softkeys to verify that the device addresses will be recognized by the analyzer The factory default addresses are DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 5 3 21 106 15 12 Device HP IB Address HP 8753D 16 Plotter port HP IB 5 Printer port HP IB 1 Disk external 0 Controller 21 Power meter HP IB 13 Note You may use other addresses with two provisions a Each device must have its own address m The address set on each device must match the one recognized by the analyzer and displayed Peripheral addresses are often set with a rear panel switch Refer to the manual of the peripheral to read or change its address If Using a Plotter or Printer 1 Ensure that the plotter or printer is set up correctly m power is on m pens and paper loaded m pinch wheels are down m some plotters need to have P1 and P2 positions set Press copy and then PLOT or PRINT MONOCHROME m If the result is a copy of the analyzer display the printing plotting features are functional in the analyzer Continue with Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers or th
87. Markings A The instruction documentation symbol The product is marked with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the instructions in the documentation CE The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community If accompanied by a year it is when the design was proven ISM1 A This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A product CSA The CSA mark is a registered trademark of the Canadian Standards Association DRAFT Safety and Licensing 15 5 3 21 106 15 15 General Safety Considerations Safety Earth Ground Warning This is a Safety Class product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited Before Applying Power Caution Make sure that the analyzer line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Caution If this product is to be energized via an autotransformer make sure the common terminal is connected to the neutral grounded side of the mains supply Servicing Warning No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To p
88. NU TESTS EXECUTE TESI YES to generate new pretune correction constants Note Always press before and after performing an adjustment test 4 Press PRESET and observe the analyzer display m No error message restore the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position Then refer to Post Repair Procedures in Chapter 14 to verify operation m Error message visible continue with A4 Sampler Mixer Check DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 5 3 21 106 15 13 A4 Sampler Mixer Check The A4 A5 and A6 R A and B sampler mixers are identical Any sampler can be used to phase lock the source To eliminate the possibility of a bad R sampler follow this procedure 1 Connect the power splitter RF cable and attenuator to inputs or B and R as shown in Figure 7 1 2 Remove the W8 cable A11J1 to A4 from the R channel sampler A4 and connect it to either the A channel sampler A5 or the B channel sampler A6 depending on which one you selected in step 1 Refer to Figure 7 3 Figure SAMMIX7 here Figure 7 3 Sampler Mixer to Phase Lock Cable Connection Diagram 3 If you connected WS to m A5 press A R E A6 press B R 4 Ignore the displayed trace but check for phase lock error messages If the phase lock problem persists the R channel sampler is not the problem 7 6 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 A3 Source and A11 Phase Lock Check This procedure checks the source and part of the phase lock assembly
89. Number Date bb 3 Receiver Minimum R Channel Level CW Frequency Specification Marker Value Measurement dB dB Uncertainty dB 300 kHz lt 35 1 0 3 29 MHz lt 35 1 0 3 31 MHz lt 35 1 0 15 90 MHz lt 35 1 0 16 10 MHz lt 35 1 0 30 90 MHz lt 35 1 0 31 10 MHz lt 35 1 0 1 6069 GHz lt 35 1 0 1 6071 GHz lt 35 1 0 3 000 GHz lt 35 1 0 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2a 7 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 7 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 4 Receiver Minimum R Channel Level for External Source Mode CW Frequency Frac N VCO Frac N VCO Measured Value Measurement MHz Lower Limit Upper Limit MHz Uncertainty MHz MHz 10 49 496 50 496 N A 20 37 620 38 380 N A 100 49 005 49 995 N A 1000 36 630 37 370 N A 3000 58 216 59 392 N A 2a 8 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 8 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 5 Receiver Channel Noise Floor Level Frequency Range IF Bandwidth Specification Calculated Measurement dBm Value Uncertainty Receiver Channel A 300 kHz 3 0 GHz 3 kHz 90 N A 300 kHz 3 0 GHz 10 Hz 110 N A Receiver Channel B 300 kHz 3 0 GHz 10 Hz 110 N A 300 kH
90. Option 006 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 2 Source Power Range Power Range and Power Linearity Linearity and Accuracy Source Power Level Power Path Loss Measured Power Spec Meas ABm Offset dB Value Linearity dB Uncer dB dB dB dB 7 3 0 25 0 0 9 1 0 25 0 0 11 1 0 25 0 0 13 3 0 25 0 0 15 5 0 5 0 0 18 8 0 5 0 17 CW Frequency 6 GHz 5 15 0 25 0 02 3 13 0 25 0 02 1 11 0 25 0 02 1 9 0 25 0 02 3 7 0 25 0 02 5 5 0 25 0 02 7 3 0 25 0 0 9 1 0 25 0 0 11 1 0 25 0 0 13 3 0 5 0 0 15 5 0 5 0 0 18 8 0 5 0 17 2b 6 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 5 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 2 Source Power Range Linearity and Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency Path Loss Calibrated Measured Power Level Spec Meas MHz dB Power Level Value Accuracy dB Uncer dB dB dB dB
91. POKE ADDRESS 1314412 x1 3 POKE the address for the appropriate test set m HP 85047A Press POKE 6 x1 PRESET m HP 85046A B Press POKE 1 x1 PRESET 4 Measure the DC voltage at pin 14 see Figure 9 4 of the analyzer rear panel test set interconnect connector Figure INTER9 here Figure 9 4 Analyzer Rear Panel Test Set Interconnect Connector Pins DRAFT Accessories Troubleshooting 9 7 3 21 106 15 13 m If the voltage is between 21 3 V and 22 7 V the supply is good Proceed with either of the following a Refer to the test set manual to troubleshoot the test set and its interconnect cable especially if the test set LEDs don t light b Continue with Troubleshooting Control Problems in S Parameter Test Sets m If the voltage is not as stated above refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 Be certain to press POKE 0 x1 PRESET after all troubleshooting and return the A9 CC jumper to normal position Troubleshooting Control Problems in S Parameter Test Sets The analyzer controls the test set attenuator the transfer switch for forward and reverse measurements and in the case of the HP 85047A bypasses the frequency doubler The associated test set interconnect connector pins are shown in Figure 9 4 refer to it as needed Note Before continuing with these procedures be sure the A9 CC jumper is set to alter and the value for the appropriate test
92. Procedures Front Panel Assembly Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver m small slot screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap m 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in lb Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Remove the bezel s softkey cover item 1 by sliding your fingernail under the left edge near the top or bottom of the cover Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel If you use another tool take care not to scratch the glass 3 Remove the two screws item 2 exposed by the previous step The bezel item 3 is now free from the frame Remove it 4 Remove the trim strip item 4 from the top edge of the front frame by prying under the strip with a small slot screwdriver 5 Remove the two screws item 5 from the top edge of the frame 6 Remove the left side trim strip item 6 from the front frame to expose four screws Remove the bottom screw item 7 14 8 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Front Panel Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 9 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Front Panel Assembly 7 Remove both front feet item 8 8 Remove the four screws item 9 from the bottom edge of the frame 9 Slide the front panel over the four Type N connectors item 10 10 Disconnect the ribbon cable W17 from the front panel by pressing down and out on the connector locks
93. R not handshaking Error Number The printer at the parallel port is not responding 177 10 48 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 PRINTER not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The printer does not respond to control Verify power to the 24 printer and check the HP IB connection between the analyzer and the printer Ensure that the printer address recognized by the analyzer matches the HP IB address set on the printer itself PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN Error Number The analyzer biasing supplies to the HP 85024A external probe are 23 shut down due to excessive current Troubleshoot the probe and refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting SAVE FAILED INSUFFICIENT MEMORY Error Number You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due to 151 insufficient memory Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save recall registers and pressing PRESET or by storing files to a disk SELF TEST n FAILED Service Error Internal test amp n has failed Several internal test routines are Number 112 executed at instrument preset The analyzer reports the first failure detected Refer to the internal tests and the self diagnose feature descriptions earlier in this chapter SLIDES ABORTED MEMORY REALLOCATION Error Number You cannot perform sliding load measurements due to insufficient 73 memory Reduce memory usage by clearing save recall registers th
94. STS 53 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES 11 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 7 DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 23 3 21 106 15 11 Figure SAMPR here Figure 3 7 Input R Sampler Correction Setup 12 Press CONTINUE The analyzer starts the first part of the automatic adjustment This part will take about seven minutes 13 For Option 006 Instruments Only After the analyzer has finished the first part of the adjustment disconnect the HP 8482A sensor A from the power splitter and replace it with the HP 8481A sensor B for the 6 GHz measurement a If you are using the HP 438A power meter the HP 8481A should be connected to the meter s channel B input a If you are using the HP 437B power meter zero and calibrate the HP 8481A sensor 14 Press CONTINUE 15 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 8 Use two cables of equal electrical length at the power splitter outputs 3 24 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Figure SAMPA here Figure 3 8 Input A Sampler Correction Setup 16 Press CONTINUE The analyzer starts the second part of the automatic adjustment DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 25 3 21 106 15 11 17 Follow the analyzer prompt to move the cable from input to input B as shown in Figure 3 9 Figure SAMPB here Figure 3 9 Input B Sampler Correction Setup 18 Press CONTINUE The analyzer starts the third part of the automatic adjustment 19
95. TITLE ADJ A13 API4 3 62 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Contents 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Assembly Replacement Sequence Having Your Analyzer Serviced Step 1 Initial Observations Initiate the Analyzer Self Test If the Self Test Failed Step 2 Operator s Check Equipment Procedure If the Operator s Check Failed Step 3 HP IB Systems Check If Using a Plotter or Printer If Using an External Disk Drive Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation Power Supply o Check the Rear Panel LEDs o Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs Digital Control Observe the Power Up Sequence Verify Internal Tests Passed Source Phase Lock Error Messages Check Source Output Power No Oscilloscope or Power Meter Try the ABUS Receiver Observe the R A and B Input Traces Receiver Error Messages Faulty Data Accessories Accessories Error Messages Index DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 4 2 4 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 6 4 6 4 7 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 9 4 9 4 10 4 10 4 10 4 12 4 12 4 13 4 13 4 15 4 15 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 18 Contents 1 Figures 4 1 Preset Sequence PPP 4 3 4 2 Operator s Check Setup Ce 4 5 4 3 Troubleshooting Organization 2 2 ee a 4 8 4 4 A15 Preregulator LEDs aoo aaa a a 4 9 4 5 Front Panel Power Up Sequence Co 4 10 4 6 Equipment Setup
96. The front panel is now free from the instrument Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note When reconnecting semi rigid cables it is recommended that the connections be torqued to 10 in lb 14 10 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Front Panel Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 11 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Rear Panel Assembly Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top and bottom covers refer to Covers in this chapter 2 Remove six screws item 1 from the rear frame two from the top edge and four from the bottom edge 3 Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer item 2 and remove the stabilizer 4 Lift the reference board A12 from its motherboard connector and disconnect W13 from A12J3 5 Remove the six screws item 3 next to the preregulator from the rear panel as shown 6 Remove the four screws item 4 surrounding the connector interfaces from the rear panel as shown 14 12 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Rear Panel Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 13 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Rear Panel Assembly 7 Pull the rear panel away from the frame Disconnect the ribb
97. Traces 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4 8 below Figure REC4 here Figure 4 8 Equipment Setup 2 Press PRESET MEAS R SCALE REF AUTO SCALE MARKER FCTN MARKERREFERENCE 3 Observe the measurement trace displayed by the R input The trace should have about the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4 9 Note The R trace will be 20 dB lower than the A and B trace due to the attenuator on the R input The flatness of the trace however should resemble that of the A and B input traces 4 Press A to check the A channel trace The trace should have about the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4 9 5 Move the input cable to the B input and press B to check the B channel trace The trace should have about the same flatness as the trace in Figure 4 9 DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 15 3 21 106 15 12 Figure TMTA here Figure 4 9 Typical Measurement Trace If the source is working but the R A or B input traces appear to be in error refer to Chapter 8 Receiver Troubleshooting The following symptoms may also indicate receiver failure Receiver Error Messages m CAUTION OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED m CAUTION OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED m CAUTION OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED 4 16 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 The error messages above indicate that you have exceeded approximately 3 dBm at one of the input ports The RF output power is auto
98. Verification and Performance Tests Having Your Analyzer Serviced The HP 8753D Option 011 has a one year on site warranty where available If the analyzer should fail any of the following checks call your local HP Sales and Service office A customer engineer will be dispatched to service your analyzer on site If a customer engineer is not available in your area follow the steps below to send your analyzer back to HP for repair 1 Choose the nearest HP service center A table listing of Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices is provided at the end of this guide 2 Include a detailed description of any failed test and any error message 3 Ship the analyzer using the original or comparable anti static packaging materials 4 2 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Step 1 Initial Observations Initiate the Analyzer Self Test 1 Disconnect all devices and peripherals from the analyzer including all test set interconnects 2 Switch on the analyzer and press PRESET 3 Watch for the indications shown in Figure 4 1 to determine if the analyzer is operating correctly Figure ORDERA here Figure 4 1 Preset Sequence If the Self Test Failed m Check the AC line power to the analyzer m Check the fuse rating listed on rear panel spare inside holder m Check the line voltage setting use small screwdriver to change m If the problem persists refer to Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation
99. W on OFF With this mode switched OFF the source stays in the pretune mode and does not attempt to complete the phase lock sequence Also all phase lock error messages are disabled The fractional N circuits and the receiver operate normally Therefore the instrument sweeps but the source is being driven by the pretune DAC in a stair stepped fashion Automatically attempts to determine new pretune values when the instrument encounters phase lock problems e g harmonic skip With PLL AUTO OFF the frequencies and voltages are not changing as they are when they are attempting to determine new pretune values so troubleshooting the phase locked loop circuits is more convenient Displays a phase lock sequence at the beginning of each band This sequence normally occurs very rapidly making it difficult to troubleshoot phase lock problems Switching this mode ON slows the process down allowing you to inspect the steps of the phase lock sequence pretune acquire and track by pausing at each step The steps are indicated on the display along with the channel C1 or C2 and band number B1 through B13 This mode can be used with PLL PAUSE to halt the process at any step It can also be used with the analog bus counter PLL PAUSE Used only with PLL DIAG mode CONT indicates that it will continuously cycle through all steps of the phase lock sequence PAUSE holds it at any step of interest This mode is useful for troubleshooting phase
100. When the analyzer completes the adjustment observe the display m If the analyzer shows DONE this procedure is complete m If the analyzer shows FAIL press PRESET and then repeat this entire procedure Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants If the analyzer shows FAIL again refer to the Receiver Troubleshooting chapter 3 26 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants Test 54 Required Equipment and Tools Low pass filter 0 0 cece cece eee tenet errar rara HP P N 9135 0198 Power splitter 0 ccc ccc ccc enn eee nee e nent e enn e eens HP 11667A Option 001 Attenuator 20 dB oo ccc eee HP 8491A Option 020 RF cable set 00 cece e ene een been een n nnn een enes HP 11851B Antistatic wrist strap ee HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire sse HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up Time 30 minutes The nominal frequency of the cavity oscillator is 2 982 GHz but it varies with temperature This procedure determines the precise frequency of the cavity oscillator at a particular temperature by identifying a known spur Note You should perform this procedure with the recommended filter or a filter with at least 50 dB of rejection at 2 9 GHz and a passband which includes 800 MHz The filter makes spur identification substantially faster and more reliable With the
101. XT REF described above to improve the frequency accuracy of the analyzer AUX INPUT This allows for a dc or ac voltage input from an external signal source such as a detector or function generator which you can then measure using the parameter menu You can also use this connector as an analog output in service routines EXT AM This allows for an external analog signal input that is applied to the ALC circuitry of the analyzer s source This input analog signal amplitude modulates the RF output signal EXT TRIG This allows connection of an external negative TTL compatible signal that will trigger a measurement sweep The trigger can be set to external through softkey functions TEST SEQ This outputs a TTL signal that can be programmed in a test sequence to be high or low or pulse 10 seconds high or low at the end of a sweep for a robotic part handler interface LIMIT TEST This outputs a TTL signal of the limit test results as follows Pass TTL high Fail TTL low Source Theory Overview The source produces a highly stable and accurate RF output signal by phase locking a YIG oscillator to a harmonic of the synthesized VCO voltage controlled oscillator The source output produces a CW or swept signal between 300 kHz and 3 GHz or 30 kHz and 6 GHz for Option 006 The source has a maximum leveled power of 20 dBm or 18 dBm for Option 006 and a minimum power of 5 dBm The full frequency range of the source is pro
102. ability to interrupt the CPU to provide information updates It controls the front panel LEDs that provide status information to the user A9 CPU A10 Digital IF The A9 CPU assembly contains the main CPU central processing unit the digital signal processor memory storage and interconnect port interfaces The main CPU is the master controller for the analyzer including the other dedicated microprocessors The memory includes EEPROM RAM EPROM and ROM Data from the receiver is serially clocked into the A9 CPU assembly from the A10 digital IF The data taking sequence is triggered either from the A14 fractional N assembly externally from the rear panel or by software on the A9 assembly Main CPU The main CPU is a 16 bit microprocessor that maintains digital control over the entire instrument through the instrument bus The main CPU receives external control information from the front panel or HP IB and performs processing and formatting operations on the raw DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 7 3 21 106 15 14 data in the main RAM It controls the digital signal processor the front panel processor the display processor and the interconnect port interfaces In addition when the analyzer is in the system controller mode the main CPU controls peripheral devices through the peripheral port interfaces The main CPU has a dedicated EPROM that contains the operating system for instrument control Front panel settings are stored in CMOS R
103. ace you can permanently destroy the display DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 41 3 21 106 15 11 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Required Equipment and Tools TORX screwdriver T 15 Non metallic adjustment tool 0 cece eee eee eee nee et HP P N 8830 0024 Antistatic wrist strap HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire sse HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This procedure centers the fractional N VCO voltage controlled oscillator in its tuning range to insure reliable operation of the instrument 1 Remove the right rear bumpers and the right side cover using the torx screwdriver 2 Press PRESET DISPLAY DUAL CHAN ON SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MENU NUMBER of POINTS 11 x1 COUPLED CH OFF 3 Press AO WD TSE GE WD WEN SWEEP TIME 25 5 WEA S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 9 to observe the FN VCO Tun voltage 4 Press FORMAT MORE REAL SCALE REF 6 1 REFERENCE VALUE 7 x1 to set and scale channel 1 Press MARKER to set the marker to the far right of the graticule 5 Press CHAN 2 MENU CW FREQ 81 0001 SWEEP TIME 12 375 k m MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 29 x1 to observe the FN VCO Tun voltage 6 Press FORMAT MORE REAL SCALE REF 2 1 REFERENCE VALUE 677 1 MARKER 6 to set channel 2 and its marker 7 Adjust the FN V
104. agnetic fields These fields can originate from many sources including unshielded motors metal frame tables and from the earth itself The usual symptom is a discoloration or slight dimming of the display usually near the top left corner of the display If this problem is observed remove the device causing the magnetic field In extreme cases a total color shift may be observed for example a trace that was red may shift to green This does not indicate a problem with the display it is characteristic of all color displays In countries that use 50 Hz AC power some 10 Hz jitters may be noticed 1 If the display becomes magnetized or if color purity is a problem cycle the analyzer power several times Leave the instrument off for at least 15 seconds before turning it on This will activate the automatic degaussing circuitry in the display 2 If the display color purity is still a problem you must use a commercially available demagnetizer such as a CRT demagnetizer or a bulk tape eraser Follow the manufacturer s instructions keeping in mind of the following m At the first pass do NOT place the demagnetizer closer than 4 inches 10 cm from the face of the display while demagnetizing the display m At the second pass if you did not completely demagnetize the display move the demagnetizer to a slightly closer distance until the display is demagnetized Caution If you apply an excessively strong magnetic field to the display f
105. agnetization of the CRT A19 GSP The A19 graphics system processor provides an interface between the A9 CPU and the A18 display The CPU A9 converts the formatted data to GSP commands and writes it to the GSP The GSP processes the data to obtain the necessary video signals and sends the signals to the A18 display It also produces RGB output signals which are sent to the A16 rear panel The assembly receives two power supply voltages 5VCPU which is used for processing and 65 V which is passed on to A18 but not used on A19 12 8 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 A16 Rear Panel The A16 rear panel includes the following interfaces TEST SET I O INTERCONNECT This allows you to connect an HP 8753D Option 011 analyzer to an HP 85046A B or 85047A S parameter test set using the interconnect cable supplied with the test set The S parameter test set is then fully controlled by the analyzer This interface also provides control signals and power to operate duplexer test adapters EXT REF This allows for a frequency reference signal input that can phase lock the analyzer to an external frequency standard for increased frequency accuracy The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference feature when a signal is connected to this input When the signal is removed the analyzer automatically switches back to its internal frequency reference 10 MHZ PRECISION REFERENCE Option 1D5 This output is connected to the E
106. al information Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools m error messages m diagnostic routines Phase Lock Error Messages All phase lock error messages can result from improper front panel connections NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means no IF was detected during pretune a source problem Perform the A4 Sampler Mixer Check NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL means the IF was not acquired after pretune a source problem Perform the A4 Sampler Mixer Check earlier in this chapter PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED means that a calculation of pretune values was not successful a source or receiver failure Perform the Source Pretune Correction Constants routine as outlined in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants If the analyzer fails that routine perform the A4 Sampler Mixer Check PHASE LOCK LOST means that phase lock was lost or interrupted before the band sweep ended a source problem Refer to Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines next to access the phase lock loop diagnostic service routine Then troubleshoot the problem by following the procedures in this chapter Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines Perform the following steps to determine at what frequencies and bands the phase lock problem occurs 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES PLL AUTO OFF to switch off the automatic phase locked loop Normally when the phase locked loop detects lock problems it automatically aborts the sweep and att
107. alk Frequency Range Specification Marker Value Measurement dB Uncertainty R into A Crosstalk 300 kHz 1 0 GHz 100 5 1 1 0 GHz 3 0 GHz 90 5 1 3 0 GHz 4 5 GHz 82 5 4 4 5 GHz 6 0 GHz 75 5 4 R into B Crosstalk 300 kHz 1 0 GHz 100 5 1 1 0 GHz 3 0 GHz 90 5 1 3 0 GHz 4 5 GHz 82 5 4 4 5 GHz 6 0 GHz 75 5 4 B into A Crosstalk 300 kHz 1 0 GHz 100 5 1 1 0 GHz 3 0 GHz 90 5 1 3 0 GHz 4 5 GHz 82 5 4 4 5 GHz 6 0 GHz 75 5 4 A into B Crosstalk 300 kHz 1 0 GHz 100 5 1 1 0 GHz 3 0 GHz 90 5 1 3 0 GHz 4 5 GHz 82 5 4 4 5 GHz 6 0 GHz 75 5 4 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 13 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 12 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 10 Receiver Trace Noise CW Frequency Ratio Measured Value Specification Measurement GHz rms Uncertainty 6 A R lt 0 010 dB 0 001 DB 6 B R lt 0 010 dB 0 001 DB 6 A B lt 0 010 dB 0 001 DB 6 A B lt 0 0705 0 01 6 B R lt 0 0705 0 01 6 A R lt 0 0705 0 01 2b 14 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 13 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006 Report Number Serial Number Date
108. all white screen for verifying the light output of the A18 display and checks for color purity In this and other solid test patterns an extremely thin full screen horizontal line will be seen about 1 4 screen height from the bottom This condition is characteristic of the display and does not indicate any problem Test Pat 2 4 Displays a red green and blue pattern for verifying the color purity of the display and also the ability to independently control each gun color If the purity of the displayed test pattern is a problem it usually indicates that the face of the display needs to be de gaussed de magnetized If purity is bad cycling the power a few times may cure the problem If this does not work a commercially available de magnetizer must be used Test Pat 5 Displays a 16 step gray scale for verifying that the palette chip on the A19 GSP board can produce 16 different amplitudes of color in this case white This pattern is also very useful when using an oscilloscope for troubleshooting The staircase pattern it produces will quickly show missing or stuck data bits Test Pat 6 Displays a 3 step gray scale pattern for adjusting the background level or 0 step so that the first bar is not visible and the second bar is just barely visible This pattern consists of the first three gray scale bars of the 16 step gray scale Test Pat 7 Displays a convergence pattern for measuring the accuracy of the color convergence It is mainl
109. alyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Before You Start Troubleshooting Make sure all of the assemblies are firmly seated Also make sure that input R has a signal of at least 35 dBm about 0 01 Vp p into 50 ohms at all times to maintain phase lock 7 2 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Power If the analyzer output power levels are incorrect but no phase lock error is present perform the following checks in the order given 1 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 To run this test press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 44 X1 EXECUTE TEST When complete DONE should appear on the analyzer display Use a power meter to verify that source power can be controlled and that the power level is approximately correct If the source passes these checks proceed with step 2 However if FAIL appears on the analyzer disp
110. anual except as noted 44 Source Def Writes default correction constants for rudimentary source power accuracy Use this test before running test 47 below 45 Pretune Def Writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock pretuning accuracy Use this test before running test 48 below 46 ABUS Cor Measures three fixed voltages on the ABUS and generates new correction constants for ABUS amplitude accuracy in both high resolution and low resolution modes Use this test before running test 48 below AT Source Cor Measures source output power accuracy flatness and linearity against an external power meter via HP IB to generate new correction constants Run tests 44 45 46 and 48 first 48 Pretune Cor Generates source pretune values for proper phase locked loop operation Run tests 44 45 and 46 first 49 Intensity Cor Stores the current values of the intensity adjustments under DISPLAY for recall of display intensity values at power on 50 Disp 2 Ex Not used in Adjustments Writes the secondary test pattern to the display for adjustments Press PRESET to exit this routine 51 IF Step Cor Measures the gain of the IF amplifiers A and B only located on the A10 digital IF to determine the correction constants for absolute amplitude accuracy DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 9 3 21 106 15 14 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 It provides smooth dynamic accuracy and absolute a
111. armonics provide the high band LO local oscillator input to the samplers In low band and super low band the operation the pulse generator is turned off A11 Phase Lock This assembly compares the first IF derived from the source output in the A4 sampler to a stable reference and generates an error voltage that is integrated into the drive for the A3 source assembly A3 Source This assembly includes a 3 0 to 6 8 GHz YIG oscillator and a 3 8 GHz cavity oscillator The outputs of these oscillators are mixed to produce the RF output signal In Option 006 30 kHz to 6 GHz the frequencies 3 0 to 6 0 GHz are no longer a mixed product but are the direct output of the YIG Oscillator The signal tracks the stable output of the synthesizer The ALC automatic leveling control circuitry is also in the A3 assembly 12 10 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Source Super Low Band Operation The Super Low Band Frequency Range is 10 kHz to 300 kHz These frequencies are generated by the A12 Reference Board They are the amplified output of the fractional N synthesizer This output is not phase locked and is not subject to ALC control Refer to Table 12 1 Table 12 1 Super Low Band Subsweep Frequencies Fractional N MHz 1st IF MHz RF Output MHz 40 0 to 43 3 0 010 to 0 300 0 010 to 0 300 Source Low Band Operation The low band frequency range is 300 kHz to 16 MHz These frequencies are generated by lockin
112. ation Factor Entry cc 3 10 Source Correction Routine Co L 3 13 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test AB 3 15 Display Intensity Correction Constants Test 49 3 16 Background Adjustment 3 16 Maximum Intensity Adjustment e 3 17 Operating Default Intensity Adjustment e 3 18 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 3 19 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 Cr 3 21 Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 Cora 3 22 Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry oaoa a a a a a 3 23 Update Sampler Correction Constants a 3 23 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants Test 54 a 3 27 Spur Search Procedure with a Filter 2 0 3 29 Spur Search Procedure without a Filter 0 en 3 30 Serial Number Correction Constant Test 55 LL 2 3 33 Option Numbers Correction Constant Test 56 Lc 3 35 Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants Test 57 3 36 Initialize EEPROMs Test 58 2 e o 3 37 EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure 3 38 How to Retrieve Correction Constant Data from the EEPROM Backup Disk 3 39 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments 2 0 2 ee o 3 40 Vertical Adjustment Procedure 2 2 ee 3 40 Focus Adjustment Procedure e 3 40 Display Degaussing Demagnetizing 2000 4 3 41 Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustmen
113. ay 15 colors plus white The numbers written below each bar indicate the tint number used to produce that bar 0 amp 100 pure red 33 pure green 67 pure blue Test Pat 14 Displays a character set for showing the user all the different types and sizes of characters available Three sets of characters are drawn in each of the three character sizes 125 characters of each size are displayed Characters 0 and 3 cannot be drawn and several others are really control characters such as carriage return and line feed Test Pat 15 Displays a bandwidth pattern for verifying the bandwidth of the display It consists of multiple alternating white and black vertical stripes Each stripe should be clearly visible A limited bandwidth would smear these lines together This adjustment can be performed in the factory only 10 12 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Service Key Menus Service Features The service feature menus are shown in Figure 10 3 and described in the following paragraphs The following keys access the service feature menus m SERVICE MODES m ANALOG BUS on OFF m PEEK POKE m FIRMWARE REVISION Figure SERVFEAT here Service Modes Menu Figure 10 3 Service Feature Menus To access this menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE on OFF SM1 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Allows you to control and monitor various circuits for troubleshooting Tests the
114. c Purpose Specific parts of the analyzer and its accessories directly contribute to the magnitude and shape of the error terms Since we know this correlation and we know what typical error terms look like we can examine error terms to monitor system performance preventive maintenance or to identify faulty components in the system troubleshooting m Preventive Maintenance A stable repeatable system should generate repeatable error terms over long time intervals for example six months If you make a hardcopy record print or plot of the error terms you can periodically compare current error terms with the record A sudden shift in error terms reflects a sudden shift in systematic errors and may indicate the need for further troubleshooting A long term trend often reflects drift connector and cable wear or gradual degradation indicating the need for further investigation and preventive maintenance Yet the system may still conform to specifications The cure is often as simple as cleaning and gaging connectors or inspecting cables Troubleshooting If a subtle failure or mild performance problem is suspected the magnitude of the error terms should be compared against values generated previously with the same instrument and calibration kit This comparison will produce the most precise view of the problem However if previously generated values are not available compare the current values to the typical values listed in Table 11 2
115. ce Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY Error Number You have defined the parallel port as general purpose I O GPIO 167 for sequencing The definition was made under the LOCAL key menus To access the parallel port for copy set the selection to PARALLEL COPY PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED Error Number An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed 4 at power on preset and any time a loss of phase lock is detected This message indicates that phase lock calibration was initiated and the first IF detected but a problem prevented the calibration from completing successfully Refer to Chapter 3 and execute pretune correction test 48 This message may appear if you connect a mixer between the RF output and R input before turning on frequency offset mode Ignore it it will go away when you turn on frequency offset This message may also appear if you turn on frequency offset mode before you define the offset PHASE LOCK LOST Error Number Phase lock was acquired but then lost Refer to Chapter 7 Source 8 Troubleshooting POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK Error Number Phase lock has been achieved but the source may be phase locked 6 to the wrong harmonic of the synthesizer Perform the source pretune correction routine documented in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter POWER UNLEVELED Error Number There is either a hardware fai
116. cesses the Edit List menu to allow modification of the external power loss data table that corrects coupled arm power loss when a directional coupler samples the RF output 10 4 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Edit List Menu To access this menu press SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS SENSR LISTS and then press one of the following CAL FACTOR SENSOR A or CAL FACTOR SENSOR B or POWER LOSS SECMENT Selects a segment frequency point to be edited deleted from or added to the current data table Works with the entry controls EDIT SEDI D Allows modification of frequency cal factor and loss values previously entered in the current data table DELETE SDEL Deletes frequency cal factor and loss values previously entered in the current data table ADD SADD Adds new frequency cal factor and loss values to the current data table up to a maximum of 12 segments frequency points PTS CLEAR LIST CLEL Deletes the entire current data table or list when YES is pressed Press NE to avoid deletion DONE EDITDONE Returns to the previous menu Self Diagnose Softkey You can access the self diagnosis function by pressing SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SELF DIAGNOSE This function examines in order the pass fail status of all internal tests and displays NO FAILURE FOUND if no tests have failed If a failure is detected the routine displays the assembly or assemblies most probably faulty and assigns a failu
117. chapter Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check Phase lock error messages may appear as a result of incorrect pretune correction constants To check this possibility perform the pretune correction constants routine The four phase lock error messages listed below are described in the Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix at the end of this chapter m NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL m NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL m PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED m PHASE LOCK LOST 1 Connect the power splitter RF cable and attenuator to inputs and R as shown in Figure 7 1 2 Make sure the A9 CC Jumper is in the ALTER position a Remove the power line cord from the analyzer b Set the analyzer on its side c Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a T 15 TORX screwdriver 7 4 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 d Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover s back edge e Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument f Move the jumper to the ALT position as shown in Figure 7 2 g Replace the bottom cover corner bumpers and power cord Figure JUMP7 here Figure 7 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU 3 Switch on the analyzer and press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 46 EXECUTE TEST to generate new analog bus correction constants Then press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST to generate default pretune correction constants Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE ME
118. connection 5 9 5 4 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection 5 14 Contents 2 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless m an error message appears on the display refer to Error Messages near the end of this chapter m the fan is not working refer to Fan Troubleshooting in this chapter The power supply group assemblies consist of the following m AS post regulator m A15 preregulator All assemblies however are related to the power supply group because power is supplied to each assembly DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 1 3 21 106 15 12 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D network analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification an
119. cord 2a 1 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 1 of 18 Calibration Lab Address Serial No Model HP 8753D Option 011 Firmware Revision Ambient Temperature Test Equipment Used Description Frequency Counter Model Number Report Number Date Last Calibration Date Customer s Name Performed by Option s Relative Humidity Trace Number Cal Due Date Power Meter Power Sensor Calibration Kit Verification Kit Notes Comments 2a 2 Performance Test Record 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 2 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 1 Source Fre quency Range and Accuracy CW Frequency Lower Limit Measured Value Upper Limit Measurement MHz MHz MHz MHz Uncertainty MHz 0 3 0 299 997 0 300 003 0 000 000 520 5 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 000 008 610 16 0 15 999 840 16 000 160 0 000 028 220 31 0 30 999 690 31 000 310 0 000 053 730 60 999 999 60 999 390 61 000 610 0 000 104 800 121 0 120 998 790 121 001 210 0 000 206 800 180 0 179 998 200 180 001 800 0 000 307 200 310 0 309 995 900 310 003 100 0 000 528 300 700 0 699 930 000 700 007 000 0 001 191 700 1 300 0 1 299 987 1 300 013 0 002 212 300 2 000 0 1
120. ct the devices in turn to PORT 2 and use the REVERSE OPEN REVERSE SHORT and REVERSE LOAD soft keys To compute the reflection correction coefficients press STANDARDS DONE To start the transmission portion of the correction press TRANSMISSION Press ISOLATION and select from the following two options a If you will be measuring devices with a dynamic range less than 90 dB press OMIT ISOLATION a If you will be measuring devices with a dynamic range greater than 90 dB follow these steps a Connect impedance matched loads to PORT 1 and PORT 2 Note If you will be measuring highly reflective devices such as filters use the test device connected to the reference plane and terminated with a load for the isolation standard 15 b Activate at least four times more averages than desired during the device measurement c Press RESUME CAL SEQUENCE ISOLATION FWD ISOL N ISOL N SID REV ISOL N ISOL N STD ISOLATION DONE d Return the averaging to the original state of the measurement and press CAL RESUME CAL SEQUENCE Make a thru connection between PORT 1 and PORT 2 as shown in Figure 11 1 11 4 Error Terms DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 16 To measure the standard when the trace has settled press TRANSMISSION DO BOTH FWD REV 17 To compute the error coefficients press DONE 2 PORT CAL The analyzer displays the corrected measurement trace The analyzer also shows the notation Cor at th
121. ctional N assemblies and the A7 pulse generator are working correctly and the instrument is phase locked If you see anything else refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter Figure NODE16 here Figure 10 11 Analog Bus Node 16 DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 29 3 21 106 15 14 Node 17 1st IF IF used for phase lock Perform step All above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 17 xi COUNTER ANALOG BUS MENU CW FREQ Vary the frequency and compare the results to the table below Entered Frequency Counter Reading 0 3 to 15 999 MHz same as entered 16 MHz to 3 GHz 1 MHz This node displays the IF frequency see nodel7 as it enters the A11 phase lock assembly via the A7 ALC assembly This signal comes from the R sampler output and is used to phase lock the source Figure NODE17 here Figure 10 12 Counter Readout Location 10 30 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Node 18 IF Det 2N IF on A11 phase lock after 3 MHz filter Perform step All above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 18 x1 STOP 20 w z SCALE REF AUTOSCALE This node detects the IF within the low pass filter limiter The filter is used during the track and sweep sequences but never in band 1 3 3 to 16 MHz The low level about 1 7 V means IF is in the passband of the filter This node can be used with the FRAC N TUNE and SRC TUNE service modes Figure NODE18 here Figure 10 13 A
122. d Performance Tests 5 2 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Simplified Block Diagram Figure 5 1 shows the power supply group in simplified block diagram form Refer to the detailed block diagram of the power supply Figure 5 8 located at the end of this chapter to see voltage lines and specific connector pin numbers Figure BLOCKS here Figure 5 1 Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram Start Here Check the Green LED and Red LED on A15 Switch on the analyzer and look at the rear panel of the analyzer Check the two power supply diagnostic LEDs on the A15 preregulator casting by looking through the holes located to the left of the line voltage selector switch See Figure 5 2 During normal operation the bottom green LED is on and the top red LED is off If these LEDs are normal then A15 is 95 verified Continue to Check the Green LEDs on A8 m If the green LED is not on steadily refer to If the Green LED on A15 is not ON Steadily in this procedure a If the red LED is on or flashing refer to If the Red LED on A15 is ON in this procedure DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 3 3 21 106 15 12 Figure LEDS here Figure 5 2 Location of A15 Diagnostic LEDs Check the Green LEDs on A8 Remove the top cover of the analyzer and locate the AS post regulator use the location diagram under the top cover if necessary Check to see if the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 are
123. d Measurements All reflection measurements high or low return loss are affected by the reflection tracking errors DRAFT Error Terms 11 9 3 21 106 15 14 Figure ERFERR here Figure 11 4 Typical ERF ERR Without and With Cables Isolation Crosstalk EXF and EXR Description Isolation is a measure of the leakage between the test ports and the signal paths The isolation error terms are characterized by measuring transmission 21 512 with loads attached to both ports during the error correction procedure Since these terms are low in magnitude they are usually noisy not very repeatable The error term magnitude changes dramatically with IF bandwidth a 10 Hz IF bandwidth must be used in order to lower the noise floor beyond the crosstalk specification Using averaging will also reduce the peak to peak noise in this error term Significant System Components m sampler crosstalk Affected Measurements Transmission measurements primarily where the measured signal level is very low are affected by isolation errors For example transmission measurements where the insertion loss of the device under test is large 11 10 Error Terms DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Figure EXFEXR here Figure 11 5 Typical EXF EXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 kHz Bandwidth Load Match ELF and ELR Description Load match is a measure of the impedance match of the test port that terminates the output of a 2 port device Load match error terms
124. d to A8 3 Remove the display power cable W14 See Figure 5 5 4 Short ASTP2 AGND see Figure 5 3 to chassis ground with a clip lead 5 Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8 a If any green LEDs other than 5VD are still off or flashing continue to Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages a If all LEDs are now on steadily except for the 5VD LED the A15 preregulator and A8 post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8 Continue to Remove the Assemblies Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages Check the fuses along the top edge of A8 If any A8 fuse has burned out replace it If it burns out again when power is applied to the analyzer A8 or A15 is faulty Determine which assembly has failed as follows 1 Remove the A15W1 cable at A8 See Figure 5 5 2 Measure the voltages at A15W1P1 see Figure 5 6 with a voltmeter having a small probe 3 Compare the measured voltages with those in Table 5 2 m If the voltages are within tolerance replace A8 m If the voltages are not within tolerance replace A15 4 If the green LEDs are now on the A15 preregulator and A8 post regulator are working properly and the trouble is excessive loading somewhere after the motherboard connections at A8 Continue to Remove the Assemblies Remove the Assemblies 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Install A8 Remove the jumper from A8TP2 AGND to chassis
125. des and features to make additional types of measurements The following describes the key differences in how the analyzer operates to achieve these new measurements Frequency Offset The analyzer can measure frequency translating devices with the frequency offset feature The receiver operates normally However the source is pretuned to a different frequency by an offset entered by the user The device under test will translate this frequency back to the frequency the receiver expects Otherwise phase locking and source operation occur as usual Harmonic Analysis Option 002 The analyzer can measure the 2nd or 3rd harmonic of the fundamental source frequency on a swept or CW basis with the harmonic analysis feature optional To make this measurement the reference frequency normally 1 MHz from the A12 reference assembly to the A11 phase lock assembly is divided by 1 2 or 3 See Figure 12 6 The fractional N assemblies are also tuned so that the correct harmonic comb tooth of the 1st LO is 0 500 or 0 333 MHz below the source frequency instead of the usual 1 000 MHz The analyzer pretunes the A3 source normally then phase locks the Ist IF to the new reference frequency to sweep the fundamental source frequency in the usual way The key difference is that the 1st IF output from the R sampler due to the fundamental and used for phase locking is now 0 500 or 0 333 MHz instead of 1 000 MHz DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 15 3 21 106
126. device Ensure that the device address recognized by the analyzer matches the HP IB address set on the device itself DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM Error Number The disk drive is not responding correctly Refer to the disk drive 39 operating manual DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 43 3 21 106 15 14 DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR Error Number The analyzer and the external disk drive aren t communicating 190 properly Check the HP IB connection and then try substituting another disk drive to isolate the problem instrument DISK not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The disk cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify power to the 38 disk drive and check the HP IB connection between the analyzer and the disk drive Ensure that the disk drive address recognized by the analyzer matches the HP IB address set on the disk drive itself DISK READ WRITE ERROR Error Number There may be a problem with your disk Try a new floppy disk If a 189 new floppy disk does not eliminate the error suspect hardware problems EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS Error Number When modifying calibration kits you can define a maximum of 72 seven standards for any class INITIALIZATION FAILED Error Number The disk initialization failed probably because the disk is damaged AT INSUFFICIENT MEMORY Error Number Your last front panel or HP IB request could not be implemented 51 due to insufficient memory space In som
127. duced in 14 subsweeps one in super low band two in low band and eleven in high band The high band frequencies 16 MHz to 3 GHz or 16 MHz to 6 GHz for Option 006 are achieved by harmonic mixing with a different harmonic number for each subsweep The low band frequencies 300 kHz to 16 MHz are down converted by fundamental mixing The super low band frequencies 10 kHz to 300 kHz are sent directly from the A12 reference board to the output of the A3 source assembly This DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 9 3 21 106 15 14 band is not phased locked nor does it use the ALC It is the basic amplified output of the fractional N synthesizer The source functional group consists of the individual assemblies described below A14 A13 Fractional N These two assemblies comprise the synthesizer The 30 to 60 MHz VCO in the A14 assembly generates the stable LO frequencies for fundamental and harmonic mixing A12 Reference This assembly provides stable reference frequencies to the rest of the instrument by dividing down the output of a 40 MHz crystal oscillator In low band operation the output of the fractional N synthesizer is mixed down in the A12 reference assembly The 2nd LO signal from the A12 assembly is explained in Receiver Theory The A12 is also the origin of the super low band portion of the 8753D source A7 Pulse Generator A step recovery diode in the pulse generator produces a comb of harmonic multiples of the VCO output These h
128. e m If the analyzer does not display DONE then either the serial number entered in steps 3 and 4 did not match the required format or a serial number was already stored Check the serial number recognized by the analyzer a Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION b Look for the serial number displayed on the analyzer screen c Rerun this adjustment test m If the analyzer continues to fail this adjustment routine contact your nearest HP Sales and Service office 3 34 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Option Numbers Correction Constant Test 56 This procedure stores instrument option s information in A9 CPU assembly EEPROMs You can also use this procedure to remove a serial number or install an option with the unique as referred to in Serial Number Correction Constant 1 Remove the instrument top cover and record the keyword label s that are on the display assembly Note that each keyword is for EACH option installed in the instrument m If the instrument does not have a label then contact your nearest HP Sales and Service office Be sure to include the full serial number of the instrument 2 Press PRESET DISPLAY MORE TITLE ERASE TITLE 3 Enter the keyword by rotating the front panel knob to position the arrow below each character of the keyword and then pressing SELECT LETTER to enter each letter Press BACKSPACE if you made a mistake 4 Press DONE when
129. e Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section in this chapter m If the result is not a copy of the analyzer display suspect the HP IB function of the analyzer Refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting If Using an External Disk Drive 1 2 Select the external disk drive Press SAVE RECALL SELECT DISK EXTERNAL DISK Verify that the address is set correctly Press LOCAL SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS DISK Ensure that the disk drive is set up correctly m power is on a an initialized disk in the correct drive m correct disk unit number and volume number press LOCAL to access the softkeys that display the numbers default is 0 for both 4 6 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 m with hard disk Winchester drives make sure the configuration switch is properly set see drive manual Press START 1 M SAVE RECALL SAVE STATE Then press PRESET SAVE RECALL RECALL STATE a If the resultant trace starts at 1 MHz HP IB is functional in the analyzer Continue with Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Troubleshooting Systems with Controllers or the Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation section in this chapter m If the resultant trace does not start at 1 MHz suspect the HP IB function of the analyzer Refer to Chapter 6 Digital Control Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Systems with Multiple Peripherals Connect any other system peripherals
130. e generator to pulse generator DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 29 3 21 106 15 13 Figure STABHO7 here Figure 7 25 Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode A7 Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope Perform this check if a spectrum analyzer is not available 1 Remove the A4 to A11 SMB cable from the A4 R sampler mixer output Connect the oscilloscope to the A4 output 1st IF 2 Activate the FRACN TUNE service mode and tune the fractional N to 50 MHz Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON 50 Z 3 Activate the SRC TUNE service mode of the analyzer and tune the source to 50 MHz Press SRC TUNE ON SRC TUNE FREQ 50 Mz 4 Set the SRC TUNE frequency to those listed in Table 7 7 and observe the 1st IF waveforms They should appear similar to Figure 7 26 m If the signals observed are proper continue with All Phase Lock Check m If the signals observed are questionable use a spectrum analyzer to perform the preceding A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer Table 7 7 1st IF Waveform Settings SRC TUNE FRACN Harmonic 1st IF 50 MHz 50 MHz 1 1 to 6 MHz 250 MHz 50 MHz 5 1 to 6 MHz 2550 MHz 50 MHz 51 1 to 6 MHz 7 30 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Figure IFWAVE7 here Figure 7 26 Typical 1st IF Waveform in FRACN TUNE SRC TUNE Mode A11 Phase Lock Check At this point the All phase lock assembly appears to be faulty its inputs should have been ve
131. e Generator Output Lo 7 28 7 24 High Quality Comb Tooth at 3 GHz Loe e 7 29 7 25 Stable HI OUT Signal in FRACN TUNE Mode o o 7 30 7 26 Typical 1st IF Waveform in FR ACN TUNE SRO 1 TUNE Mode a 7 31 7 27 FM Coil Plot with 3 Point Sweep e 7 33 Tables 7 1 Output Frequency in SRC Tune Mode 242 7 7 7 2 Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies 7 12 7 3 A12 Reference Frequencies e 7 13 7 4 A12 Related Digital Control Signals e 7 21 7 5 VCO Range Check Frequencies PP 7 22 7 6 A14 to A13 Digital Control Signal Locations PP 7 26 7 7 1st IF Waveform Settings 2 e 7 30 7 8 All Input Signals 2 7 32 DRAFT Contents 3 3 21 106 15 13 Source Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here This chapter is divided into two troubleshooting procedures for the following problems m Incorrect power levels Perform the Power troubleshooting checks m Phase lock error Perform the Phase Lock Error troubleshooting checks The source group assemblies consist of the following m A3 source m A4 sampler mixer a A7 pulse generator m All phase lock m A12 reference m A13 fractional N analog m A14 fractional N digital DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 1 3 21 106 15 13 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Network An
132. e cases this is a fatal error from which you can escape only by presetting the instrument 10 44 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 MORE SLIDES NEEDED Error Number When you use a sliding load in a user defined calibration kit you 71 must set at least three slide positions to complete the calibration NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS Error Number The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration 69 is already in progress Start a new calibration NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE Error Number The store operation will overflow the available disk space Insert a 44 new disk or purge files to create free disk space NO FILE S FOUND ON DISK Error Number No files of the type created by an analyzer store operation were 45 found on the disk If you requested a specific file title that file was not found on the disk NO IF FOUND CHECK R INPUT LEVEL Error Number The first IF signal was not detected during pretune Check the 5 front panel R channel jumper If there is no visible problem with the jumper refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting NO PHASE LOCK CHECK R INPUT LEVEL Error Number The first IF signal was detected at pretune but phase lock could 7 not be acquired Refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 45 3 21 106 15 14 NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL CLEAR REGISTERS Error Number You cannot st
133. e equipment as shown in Figure 4 6 Figure ESSPC4 here Figure 4 6 Equipment Setup for Source Power Check 2 Zero and calibrate the power meter Press PRESET on the analyzer to initialize the instrument 3 On the analyzer press MENU CW FREQ 00 k m to output a CW 300 kHz signal The power meter should read approximately 4 dBm The frequency response of the power splitter may account for up to 4 El dB difference 4 Press 16 M to change the CW frequency to 16 MHz The power output power should remain approximately 4 dBm throughout the analyzers s frequency range Repeat this step at 1 and 3 GHz For Option 006 include an additional check at 6 GHz If any incorrect power levels are m easured refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting No Oscilloscope or Power Meter Try the ABUS Monitor ABUS node 16 1 Press PRESET START 300 k m STOP 3 G n SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON 2 MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input 16 x1 3 FORMAT MORE REAL SCALE REF AUTOSCALE The display should resemble Figure 4 7 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Start Troubleshooting Here 4 13 Figure ABUSA here Figure 4 7 ABUS Node 16 1V GHz If any of the above procedures provide unexpected results or if error messages are present refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting 4 14 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Receiver Observe the R A and B Input
134. e is in the cable or the assembly m If the lst LO is good continue with Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler Mixer Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler Mixer Check the 2nd LO signal at the pins identified in Table 8 3 Refer to the A12 Reference Check in Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting for analog bus and oscilloscope checks of the 2nd LO and waveform illustrations Table 8 3 identifies the signal location at the samplers and the A12 assembly Table 8 3 2nd LO Locations Mnemonic Description Sampler Signal Location Source 2nd LO 1 2nd LO 0 degrees A4 5 6 P1 11 A12P1 2 32 2nd LO 2 2nd LO 90 degrees A4 5 6 P1 4 A12P1 4 34 If the 2nd LO is good at the sampler mixer the sampler mixer assembly is faulty Otherwise troubleshoot the A12 assembly and associated signal path 8 10 Receiver Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Contents 9 Accessories Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence 1 eee ee 9 2 Inspect the Accessories Loe ee 9 3 Inspect the System s Connectors and Calibration Devices a 9 3 Switch Repeatability 2 2 2 ee a 9 3 Inspect the Error Terms a a a a a 9 3 Cable Test e 9 4 Verify Shorts and Opens a 9 5 Test Set Troubleshooting o 9 6 Troubleshooting Power Problems i in S Parameter Test Sets a 9 6 Troubleshooting Control Problems in S Parameter Test Sets 2 9 8 Index DRAFT Contents 1 3 21 106 15 13 Figures 9 1
135. e left of the screen indicating that error correction is on Note You can save or store the measurement correction to use for later measurements Use the menus under SAVE RECALL or refer to Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results located in the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User s Guide for procedures 18 This completes the full two port correction procedure You can connect and measure your device under test Table 11 1 Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests Meaning of second subscript F forward R reverse Calibration Calibration Type Test Coefficient Number Response Response 1 port 2 port and Isolation 1 Ep or Er Ex Ep Ep Epr 32 2 Er En Es Esp 33 3 En Err 34 4 Exp 35 5 Err 36 6 Err 37 7 EDR 38 8 Esr 39 9 ERR 40 10 Exa 41 11 ELR 42 12 Err 43 NOTES Meaning of first subscript D directivity S source match R reflection tracking X crosstalk L load match T transmission tracking parameter S11 S22 One path 2 port cal duplicates arrays 1 to 6 in arrays 7 to 12 Response and Isolation cal yields Ex or Er if a transmission parameter S21 512 or Ep or Ep if a reflection DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Error Terms 11 5 Error Term Inspection Note If the correction is not active press CAL CORRECTION ON Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 52 lt 1 EXECUTE TEST The analyzer copies the fi
136. e of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance DRAFT Safety and Licensing 15 1 3 21 106 15 15 NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HEWLETT PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office 15 2 Safety and Licensing DRAFT 3 21 106 15 15 Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices US FIELD OPERATIONS Headquarters Hewlett Packard Co 19320 Pruneridge Avenue Cupertino CA 95014 800 752 0900 Colorado Hewlett Packard Co 24 Inverness Place East Englewood CO 80112 303 649 5512 New Jersey Hewlett Packard Co 150 Green Pond Rd Rockaway NJ 07866 201 586 5400 California Northern Hewlett Packard Co 301 E Evelyn Mountain View CA 94041 415 694 2000 Atlanta Annex Hewlett Packard Co 2124 Barrett Park Drive Kennesaw GA 30144 404 648 0000 Texas Hewlett Packard Co 930 E Campbell Rd Richardson TX 75081 214
137. ection Constants Test 48 a Display Intensity Correction Constants Test 49 m IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 m ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 m Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 a Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction Constants Test 54 m Serial Number Correction Constants Test 55 m Option Numbers Correction Constants Test 56 m Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants Test 57 s Initialize EEPROMs Test 58 EEPROM Backup a Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments a Display Degaussing Demagnetizing m Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment m Frequency Accuracy Adjustment a High Low Band Transition Adjustment m Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment m Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment m Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 1 3 21 106 15 11 Post Repair Procedures for HP 8753D Option 011 Table 3 1 lists the additional service procedures which you must perform to ensure that the instrument is working correctly following the replacement of an assembly Perform the procedures in the order that they are listed in the table Table 3 1 Related Service Procedures Interface Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants CC Al Front Panel None Internal Test O Keyboard Internal Test 23 A2 Front Panel None Internal Test O Internal Test 23
138. eform 8 8 Receiver Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants Off 1 Press PRESET MEAS A SCALE REF AUTO SCALE 2 The trace is currently being displayed with the sampler correction constants on and should resemble Figure 8 7a 3 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES MORE SAMPLER COR OFF 4 The trace is now being displayed with sampler correction constants off and should have worsened to resemble Figure 8 7b 5 Press SAMPLER COR ON The trace should improve and resemble Figure 8 7a again Note When the correction constants are switched off an absolute offset and bandswitch points may be evident If the trace shows no improvement when the sampler correction constants are toggled from off to on perform the Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 adjustment described in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants If the trace remains bad after this adjustment the A10 assembly is defective Figure TRACES here Figure 8 7 Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and Off DRAFT Receiver Troubleshooting 8 9 3 21 106 15 13 Check ist LO Signal at Sampler Mixer If the 4 kHz signal is bad at the sampler mixer assembly check the 1st LO signal where it enters the sampler mixer assembly in question m Ifthe 1st LO is faulty check the Ist LO signal at its output connector on the A7 assembly to determine if the failur
139. egulator None Self Test A16 Rear Panel None Internal Test 13 Interface Rear Panel A17 Motherboard None Self Test A18 Display Vertical Position and Focus only if needed Observation of Display Tests 66 80 A19 Graphics System Processor None Observation of Display Tests 59 80 14 54 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures DRAFT 3 21 106 15 15 Contents 15 Safety and Licensing Notice o Certification Warranty Assistance Shipment for Service Safety Symbols Instrument Markings General Safety Considerations Safety Earth Ground Before Applying Power Servicing Index DRAFT 3 21 106 15 15 15 1 15 1 15 1 15 2 15 4 15 5 15 5 15 6 15 6 15 6 15 6 Contents 1 15 Safety and Licensing Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Certification Hewlett Packard Company certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Hewlett Packard further certifies that its calibration measuremen
140. eiver Input Impedance Frequency Range B Return Loss A Return Loss R Return Loss Specification Measurement A R B R A B dB Uncertainty dB 300 kHz 2 MHz gt 20 0 58 2 MHz 1 3 GHz gt 23 0 58 1 3 GHz 3 GHz gt 20 0 58 2a 14 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 14 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 12 Receiver Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy G F IG F Test Port 8496A Test Port Expected Dynamic Spec Meas Input Power Attn Measurement Measurement Accuracy dB Uncer dB dBm dBm Calculated dB Channel B 10 0 lt 0 075 0 008 20 Ref 10 Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference 30 20 lt 0 050 0 008 40 30 lt 0 050 0 008 50 40 lt 0 050 0 008 60 50 lt 0 058 0 017 70 60 lt 0 089 0 017 80 70 lt 0 240 0 017 90 80 lt 0 680 0 017 100 90 lt 1 950 0 027 Channel A 10 0 lt 0 075 0 008 20 Ref 10 Reference Reference Reference Reference Reference 30 20 lt 0 050 0 008 40 30 lt 0 050 0 008 50 40 lt 0 050 0 008 60 50 lt 0 058 0 017 70 60 lt 0 089 0 017 80 70 lt 0 240 0 017
141. el is active and restart the calibration CALIBRATION REQUIRED Error Number A calibration set could not be found that matched the current 63 stimulus state or measurement parameter You will have to perform a new calibration 10 42 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED Error Number A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful You must 3 change the position of the jumper on the A9 CPU assembly Refer to the A9 CC Jumper Position Procedure in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter CORRECTION TURNED OFF Error Number Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not match 66 the parameters for the calibration set therefore correction has been turned off The critical instrument state parameters are sweep type start frequency frequency span and number of points CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET Error Number Correction is not valid for your selected measurement parameter 64 Either change the measurement parameters or perform a new calibration DEADLOCK Error Number A fatal firmware error occurred before instrument preset completed 111 Call your local Hewlett Packard sales and service office DEVICE not on not connect wrong addrs Error Number The device at the selected address cannot be accessed by the 119 analyzer Verify that the device is switched on and check the HP IB connection between the analyzer and the
142. embly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A3 Source Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 25 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A4 A5 A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in 1b a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover refer to Covers in this chapter To remove the R sampler A4 you must remove the source bracket item 1 Disconnect all cables from the top of the sampler A4 A5 A6 or pulse generator AT Be WwW NM e Remove the screws from the top of the assembly Extract the assembly from the slot Note a If you are removing the pulse generator A7 the grounding clip which rests on top of the assembly will become loose once the four screws are removed Be sure to replace the grounding clip when reinstalling the pulse generator assembly a If you re removing more than one sampler be careful not to mix them The R sampler A4 is different from the A and B samplers A5 and A6 Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note m When reconnecting semi rigid cables it is recommended that the connections be torqued to 10 in lb m Be sure to route W8 and W9 as shown No excess wire should be hanging in the All and A14 board slots Routing the wires in this mann
143. empts to recalibrate the pretune cycle Switching off PLL AUTO defeats this routine 2 Press PLL DIAG ON to switch on the phase locked loop diagnostic service mode In this mode the phase lock cycle and subsweep number are displayed on the analyzer display See Service Modes Menu in Chapter 10 Service Key Menus and Error Messages for more information 7 34 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 3 Press PLL PAUSE to pause the phase lock sequence and determine where the source is trying to tune when lock is lost Refer to Source Theory Overview in Chapter 12 Theory of Operation for additional information regarding band related problems Then use the procedures in this chapter to check source functions at specific frequencies DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 35 3 21 106 15 13 Con tents 8 DRAFT Receiver Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence Receiver Failure Error Messages Check the R A and B inputs Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad Run Internal Tests 18 and 17 Check 2nd LO Check the 4 MHz REF Signal Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good Check the 4 kHz Signal Check the Trace with the Sampler Correction Constants Off Check Ist LO Signal at Sampler Mixer Check 2nd LO Signal at Sampler Mixer Index 3 21 106 15 13 8 2 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 5 8 5 8 8 8 8 8 9 8 10 8 10 Content
144. en DRAFT Accessories Troubleshooting 9 5 3 21 106 15 13 Figure SMITH9 here Figure 9 2 Typical Smith Chart Traces of Good Short a and Open b Test Set Troubleshooting Test set problems are of three varieties RF problems power problems and control problems The HP 85044A B can only experience RF problems as it is not powered or controlled by the analyzer To troubleshoot m The HP 85044 B refer to its manual m S parameter test set RF problems refer to their manuals m S parameter power or control problems continue with Troubleshooting Power Problems in S Parameter Test Sets power problems can affect control Troubleshooting Power Problems in S Parameter Test Sets HP 8753D Option 011 with HP 85047A or 85046A B Do not connect the test set to the analyzer to perform these checks 1 Move the A9 CC Jumper to the ALTER position Remove the power line cord from the analyzer m Set the analyzer on its side m Remove the two corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with a T 15 TORX screwdriver m Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover s back edge m Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument 9 6 Accessories Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 m Move the jumper to the ALT position as shown in Figure 9 3 m Replace the bottom cover corner bumpers and power cord Figure JUMP9 here Figure 9 3 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU PEEK
145. en repeat the sliding load measurements DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 3 21 106 15 14 SOURCE POWER TRIPPED RESET UNDER POWER MENU Information You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the inputs Message and power has been automatically reduced The annotation P indicates that power trip has been activated When this occurs reset the power and then press MENU POWER SOURCE PWR on OFF to switch on the power This message follows error numbers 57 58 and 59 SYSTEM IS NOT IN REMOTE Error Number The analyzer is in local mode In this mode the analyzer will not 52 respond to HP IB commands with front panel key equivalents It will however respond to commands that have no such equivalents such as status requests TEST ABORTED Error Number You have prematurely stopped a service test 113 SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP Error Number If you select external source auto or manual instrument mode and 187 you do not also select CW mode the analyzer is automatically switched to CW TROUBLE CHECK SETUP AND START OVER Service Error Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress is Number 115 not correct Check the setup diagram and instructions in the Adjustments and Correction Constants chapter Start the procedure again WRONG DISK FORMAT INITIALIZE DISK Error Number You have attempted to store load or read file titles but your disk TT format does
146. equency Power R Input A Input B Input Greatest Spec Meas Meter Power Power Power Difference dB Uncer Reading dB Example 10 0 10 14 10 09 10 10 0 14 1 0 05 300 kHz 1 0 14 5 MHz 1 0 10 16 MHz 1 0 10 31 MHz 1 0 10 61 MHz 1 0 10 121 MHz 1 0 10 180 MHz 1 0 10 310 MHz 1 0 10 700 MHz 1 0 10 1 5 GHz 1 0 10 2 0 GHz 1 0 10 2 5 GHz 1 0 11 3 0 GHz 1 0 11 3 5 GHz 2 0 11 4 0 GHz 2 0 11 4 5 GHz 2 0 14 5 0 GHz 2 0 14 5 5 GHz 2 0 14 6 0 GHz 2 0 14 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 11 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 10 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 8 Phase Frequency Response Frequency Range Ratio Specification Measured Value Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz 3 GHz A R 3 0 67 300 kHz 3 GHz B R 3 0 67 300 kHz 3 GHz A B 3 0 67 3 GHz 6 GHz A B 10 0 67 3 GHz 6 GHz A R 10 0 67 3 GHz 6 GHz B R 10 0 67 2b 12 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 11 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 9 Receiver Input Crosst
147. er an entry disables the option Hardware PEEK POKE Options Address 1D5 5243250 011 5243256 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for all of the unprotected options that you want to enable 3 56 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 6 After you have entered all of the instrument s hardware options press the following keys SYSTEM SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION 7 View the analyzer display for the listed options 8 When you have entered all of the hardware options return the A9 CC jumper to the NRM NORMAL position 9 Perform the EEPROM Backup Disk Procedure located on page 3 42 In Case of Difficulty If any of the installed options are missing from the list return to step 2 and reenter the missing option s DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 57 3 21 106 15 11 Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments The network analyzer has the capability of automating tasks through a sequencing function The following adjustment sequences are available through InterNet a Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment a High Low Band Transition Adjustment m Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment How to Load Sequences from Disk 1 Place the sequence disk in the analyzer disk drive 2 Press LOCAL SYSTEM CONTROLLER SEQUENCE MORE LOAD SEQUENCE FROM DISK READ SEQUENCE FILE TITLES 3 Select any or all of the following sequence files by pressing m Select LOAD SEQ APIADJ if yo
148. er display shaded from bright lights press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 49 xi 3 The display should show Intensity Cor ND Note The display could be so far out of adjustment that the annotation would be very difficult to read 3 16 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 4 Press EXECUTE TEST and YES at the prompt to alter the correction constants Alternating vertical bars of three different intensities will be drawn on the display Each bar has a number written below it 0 1 or 2 5 Adjust the analyzer front panel knob until the vertical bar labeled 1 is just barely visible against the black border Vertical bar 0 must not be visible Maximum Intensity Adjustment This adjustment ensures that the light output at the 100 intensity level is equal to or less than 150 Nits The level is set using a photometer to measure the output light Caution If you operate the display at intensities higher than 150 Nits you may reduce the life of the display 6 Press the top softkey The analyzer display should have an all white screen 7 Zero the photometer according to the manufacturer s instructions 8 Center the photometer on the analyzer display as shown in Figure 3 5 Figure INTENSE here Figure 3 5 Maximum Intensity Adjustment Setup Note The intensity levels are read with a display bezel installed The glass filter transmits 60 of the display light therefore
149. er of the removal procedure 14 40 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A17 Motherboard Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 41 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A18 Display Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver a T 15 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 2 I OD ow Disconnect the power cord Remove the bezel s softkey cover item 1 by sliding your fingernail under the left edge near the top or bottom of the cover Pry the softkey cover away from the bezel If you use another tool take care not to scratch the glass Remove the two screws item 2 exposed by the previous step The bezel item 3 is now free from the frame Remove it Remove the top cover refer to Covers in this chapter Disconnect the ribbon cable A18W1 from the graphics processor board A19 Remove the four screws item 4 on the top of the display housing Slide the display A18 out of the instrument pushing on the back of the display assembly There is an opening at the rear of the display housing where you can reach in with a couple of fingers to push the display Replacement 1 Remove the bottom shield that is attached to the replacement display Install the bottom shield on the old display assembly before you return it for repair 2 Ensure the ribbon cable A18W1 is connected to the display so
150. er will reduce noise and crosstalk 14 26 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A4 A5 A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 27 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A8 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 Card Cage Boards Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover refer to Covers in this chapter 2 Remove the screw from the pc board stabilizer item 1 and remove the stabilizer 3 Lift the two extractors item 2 located at each end of the board Lift the board from the card cage slot just enough to disconnect any flexible cables that may be connected to it 4 Remove the board from the card cage slot Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note Be sure to route W8 and W9 as shown No excess wire should be hanging in the All and Al4 board slots Routing the wires in this manner will reduce noise and crosstalk in the instrument 14 28 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A8 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 Card Cage Boards Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 29 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A9 CPU Board Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal
151. ernal keyboard to rename the file FILEO TO N 12345 where 12345 represents the last 5 digits of the instrument s serial number The first character in the filename must be a letter When you are finished renaming the file press DONE 3 38 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 5 Write the following information on the disk label m analyzer serial number a today s date a EEPROM Backup Disk How to Retrieve Correction Constant Data from the EEPROM Backup Disk 1 Insert the EEPROM Backup Disk into the analyzer disk drive 2 Make sure the A9 CC jumper is in the ALTER position 3 Press SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK Use the front panel knob to highlight the file N12345 where N12345 represents the file name of the EEPROM data for the analyzer On the factory shipped EEPROM backup disk the filename is FILE1 4 Press RETURN RECALL STATE to down load the correction constants data into the instrument EEPROM s 5 Perform Serial Number Correction Constants Test 55 and if applicable Option Numbers Correction Constant Test 56 6 Press PRESET and verify that good data was transferred to EEPROM by performing a simple measurement 7 Move the A9 CC jumper back to its NORMAL position when you are done working with the instrument DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 39 3 21 106 15 11 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustments Required Equipment and Tools To
152. essages 10 7 15 14 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Rear Panel Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the rear panel control elements It tests the A16 rear panel and A9 CPU data buffering and address decoding It does not test the HP IB interface for that see the HP IB Programming Guide This runs only when selected or with ALL INTERNAL Post Reg Polls the status register of the A8 post regulator and flags these conditions heat sink too hot inadequate air flow or post regulated supply shutdown Frac N Cont Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the control element on the A14 fractional N digital assembly The control element must be functioning and the fractional N VCO must be oscillating although not necessarily phase locked to pass Sweep Trig Tests the sweep trigger L SWP line from the A14 fractional N to the A10 digital IF The receiver with the sweep synchronizes L SWP ADC Lin Tests the linearity of the A10 digital IF ADC using the built in ramp generator The test generates a histogram of the ADC linearity where each data point represents the relative width of a particular ADC code Ideally all codes have the same width different widths correspond to non linearities ADC Ofs This runs only when selected It tests the ability of the offset DAC on the A10 digital IF to apply a bias offset to the IF signals before the ADC input This runs only
153. est Set Step Attenuator The Receiver Block The Microprocessor Required Peripheral Equipment A Close Look at the Analyzer s Functional Groups Power Supply Theory A15 Preregulator Line Power Module Preregulated Voltages Regulated 5 V Digital Supply Shutdown Indications the Green LED and Red LED A8 Post Regulator Voltage Indications the Green LEDs Shutdown Circuit Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector Display Power Probe Power Digital Control Theory Al Front Panel A2 Front Panel Processor A9 CPU A10 Digital IF Main CPU Main RAM EEPROM Digital Signal Processor A18 Display A19 GSP A16 Rear Panel Source Theory Overview A14 A13 Fractional N A12 Reference AT Pulse Generator All Phase Lock A3 Source Source Super Low Band Operation Source Low Band Operation Source High Band Operation Source Operation in other Modes Features DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 12 1 12 2 12 2 12 3 12 3 12 3 12 3 12 3 12 4 12 4 12 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 12 5 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 6 12 7 12 7 12 7 12 7 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 8 12 9 12 9 12 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 12 10 12 11 12 11 12 13 12 15 Contents 1 Frequency Offset e 12 15 Harmonic Analysis Option 002 12 15 External Source Mode 12 16 Tuned Receiver Mode Lccccccl a 12 17 Signal Separation ee 12218 External Test Sets 2 2 2 a a a a a 12 18 Receiver Theory L 12 19 A4 A5 A6 Sampler Mixer Lo Co ee
154. f the main processor and the DSP digital signal processor both on the A9 CPU assembly to communicate with each other through DRAM This also verifies that programs can be loaded to the DSP and that most of the main RAM access circuits operate correctly DSP RAM Verifies the A9 CPU RAM associated with the digital signal processor by using a write read pattern DSP ALU Verifies the A9 CPU high speed math processing portions of the digital signal processor DSP Intrpt Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to respond to interrupts from the A10 digital IF ADC DIF Control Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the control latches on the A10 digital IF DIF Counter Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the triple divider on the A10 CPU It tests the A9 CPU data buffers and A10 digital IF the 4 MHz clock from the A12 reference DSP Control Tests the ability of the A9 CPU digital signal processor to write to the control latches on the A10 digital IF Feedback is verified by the main processor It primarily tests the A10 digital IF but failures may be caused by the A9 CPU Fr Pan Wr Rd Tests the ability of the A9 CPU main processor to write read to the front panel processor It tests the A2 front panel interface and processor and A9 CPU data buffering and address decoding See also tests 23 and 24 below This runs only when selected Service Key Menus and Error M
155. following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests 9 2 Accessories Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Inspect the Accessories Inspect the System s Connectors and Calibration Devices 1 Check for damaged mating interfaces and loose connector bulkheads on the analyzer s front panel connectors 2 Check the test set and power splitter connectors for defects as well 3 Inspect the calibration kit devices for bent or broken center conductors and other physical damage Refer to the calibration kit operating and service manual for information on gaging and inspecting the device connectors If any calibration device is obviously damaged or out of mechanical tolerance replace the device Switch Repeatability Calibration does not compensate for the repeatability of the
156. for Source Power Check Lo 4 13 4 7 ABUS Node 16 1V GHz 1 2 2 o 4 14 4 8 Equipment Setup 2 2 2 A 4 15 4 9 Typical Measurement Trace Lo 4 16 4 10 HP 8753D Option 011 Overall Block Diagram Co 4 20 Contents 2 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Start Troubleshooting Here The information in this chapter helps you m Identify the portion of the analyzer that is at fault m Locate the specific troubleshooting procedures to identify the assembly or peripheral at fault To identify the portion of the analyzer at fault follow these procedures Step 1 Initial Observations Step 2 Operator s Check Step 3 HP IB System Check Step 4 Faulty Group Isolation DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 1 3 21 106 15 12 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System
157. g the A3 source to a reference signal The reference signal is synthesized by mixing down the fundamental output of the fractional N VCO with a 40 MHz crystal reference signal Low band operation differs from high band in these respects The reference frequency for the All phase lock is not a fixed 1 MHz signal but varies with the frequency of the fractional N VCO signal The sampler diodes are biased on to pass the signal through to the mixer The lst IF signal from the A4 sampler is not fixed but is identical to the RF output signal from the A3 source and sweeps with it The following steps outline the low band sweep sequence illustrated in Figure 12 4 1 A signal FN LO is generated by the fractional N VCO The VCO in the A14 Fractional N assembly generates a CW or swept signal that is 40 MHz greater than the start frequency The signal is divided down to 1OO kHz and phase locked in the A13 assembly as in high band operation 2 The fractional N VCO signal is mixed with 40 MHz to produce a reference signal The signal FN LO from the Fractional N VCO goes to the A12 reference assembly where it is mixed with the 40 MHz VCXO voltage controlled crystal oscillator The resulting signal is the reference to the phase comparator in the All assembly 3 The A3 source is pretuned The signal RF OUT is fed to the A4 sampler The pretuned DAC in the All phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a frequency 1 to 6 MHz above the start frequency This
158. ge before use Use an out of spec connector Use the correct gage type Use correct end of calibration block Gage all connectors before first use Making Connections Do Do Not Align connectors carefully Apply bending force to connection Make preliminary connection lightly Over tighten preliminary connection Turn only the connector nut Twist or screw any connection Use a torque wrench for final connect Tighten past torque wrench break point 1 6 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options DRAFT 3 21 106 15 06 Analyzer Options Available Option 1D5 High Stability Frequency Reference This option offers 0 05 ppm temperature stability from 0 to 60 C referenced to 25 C Option 002 Harmonic Mode This option provides measurement of second or third harmonics of the test device s fundamental output signal Frequency and power sweep are supported in this mode Harmonic frequencies can be measured up to the maximum frequency of the receiver However the fundamental frequency may not be lower than 16 MHz Option 006 6 GHz Operation This option extends the maximum source and receiver frequency of the analyzer to 6 GHz Option 010 Time Domain This option displays the time domain response of a network by computing the inverse Fourier transform of the frequency domain response It shows the response of a test device as a function of time or distance Displaying the reflection coefficient of a network versus
159. ge selector switch and main fuse The line power switch is activated from the front panel The voltage selector switch accessible at the rear panel adapts the analyzer to local line voltages of approximately 115 V or 230 V with 350 VA maximum The main fuse which protects the input side of the preregulator against drawing too much line current is also accessible at the rear panel Refer to the HP 8753D Network Analyzer Installation and Quick Start Guide for line voltage tolerances and other power considerations Preregulated Voltages The switching preregulator converts the line voltage to several DC voltages The regulated 5 V digital supply goes directly to the motherboard The following partially regulated voltages are routed through A15W1 to the A8 post regulator for final regulation 70 V 25V 18V 18V 8V 8V Regulated 5 V Digital Supply The 5VD supply is regulated by the control circuitry in the A15 preregulator It goes directly to the motherboard and from there to all assemblies requiring a low noise digital supply A 5 V sense line returns from the motherboard to the A15 preregulator The 5VCPU is derived from the 5VD in the A8 post regulator and goes directly to the A19 graphics system processor In order for the preregulator to function the 5 V digital supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies and the 5 V sense line must be working If not the other preregulated voltages will not be correct Shutdown Ind
160. ght troubleshoot for a short between the motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 6 and 36 12 6 V and the front panel probe power connectors Also check between motherboard connector pins XA8P2 pins 4 and 34 15 V and the front panel probe power connectors 5 18 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Fan Troubleshooting Fan Speeds The fan speed varies depending upon temperature It is normal for the fan to be at high speed when the analyzer is just switched on and then change to low speed when the analyzer is cooled Check the Fan Voltages If the fan is dead refer to the A8 post regulator block diagram Figure 5 8 at the end of this chapter The fan is driven by the 18 V and 18 V supplies coming from the A15 preregulator Neither of these supplies is fused The 18 V supply is regulated on A8 in the fan drive block and remains constant at approximately 14 V It connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 32 of the A8P1 connector The 18 V supply is regulated on A8 but changes the voltage to the fan depending on airflow and temperature information Its voltage ranges from approximately 1 0 V to 14 7 V and connects to the A17 motherboard via pin 31 of the A8P1 connector Measure the voltages of these supplies while using an extender board to allow access to the PC board connector A8P1 Short A8TP3 to Ground If there is no voltage at A8P1 pins 31 and 32 switch off the analyzer Remove A8 from its
161. gnal from the R sampler is fed back to the A11 phase lock assembly Refer to Source Theory Overview for information on high band and low band operation of the source 12 20 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 The 2nd LO Signal The 2nd LO is obtained from the A12 reference assembly In high band the 2nd LO is fixed at 996 kHz This is produced by feeding the 39 84 MHz output of a phase locked oscillator in the A12 assembly through a divide by 40 circuit In low band the 2nd LO is a variable frequency produced by mixing the output of the fractional N VCO with a fixed 39 996 MHz signal in the A12 assembly The 2nd LO covers the range of 0 304 to 16 004 MHz 0 014 to 16 004 MHz if Option 011 is combined with Option 006 in two subsweeps that correspond with the source subsweeps These subsweeps are 0 304 to 3 304 MHz and 3 304 to 16 004 MHz The Mixer Circuit The Ist IF and the 2nd LO are combined in the mixer circuit The resulting difference frequency the 2nd IF is a constant 4 kHz in both bands as Table 12 4 shows Table 12 4 Mixer Frequencies Band 1st IF 2nd LO 2nd IF Super Low 0 010 to 0 300 MHz 0 014 to 0 304 MHz 4 0 kHz Low 0 300 to 16 0 MHz 0 304 to 16 004 MHz 4 0 kHz High 1 000 MHz 0 996 MHz 4 0 kHz This band is present on the HP 8753D Option 011 only when it is combined with the Option 006 A10 Digital IF The three 4 kHz 2nd IF signals from the sampler mixer assemblies are input
162. gram Start Here Check the Green LED and Red LED on A15 Check the Green LEDs on A8 Measure the Post Regulator Voltages If the Green LED on A15 is not ON Steadily Check the Line Voltage Selector Switch and Fuse If the Red LED on A15 is ON o Check the A8 Post Regulator Verify the A15 Preregulator Check for a Faulty Assembly Check the Operating Temperature Inspect the Motherboard If the Green LEDs on AS are not All ON Remove A8 Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection Check the A8 Fuses and Voltages Remove the Assemblies Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry Inspect the Motherboard Error Messages Check the Fuses and Isolate AS Fan Troubleshooting Fan Speeds Check the Fan Voltages Short ASTP3 to Ground Intermittent Problems Index DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 5 2 5 3 5 3 5 3 5 4 5 4 5 6 5 6 5 7 5 7 5 8 5 9 5 10 5 10 5 11 5 11 5 11 5 11 5 12 5 15 5 16 5 18 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 19 5 20 Contents 1 Figures 5 1 Power Supply Group Simplified Block Diagram 5 3 5 2 Location of Al5 Diagnostic LEDs o 5 4 5 3 A8 Post Regulator Test Point Locations 5 5 5 4 Removing the Line Fuse 5 6 5 5 Power Supply Cable Locations 5 7 5 6 A15W1 Plug Detail 5 8 5 7 Front Panel Probe Power Connector Voltages 5 17 5 8 Power Supply Block Diagram Loe 5 21 Tables 5 1 A8 Post Regulator Test Point Voltages 5 5 5 2 Output Voltages 5 8 5 3 Recommended Order for Removal Dis
163. ground 3 Remove or disconnect all the assemblies listed below See Figure 5 5 Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting an assembly A10 digital IF A11 phase lock A12 reference A13 fractional N analog DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 11 3 21 106 15 12 11 12 A14 fractional N digital A19 graphics processor disconnect W14 A18W1 and W20 Switch on the analyzer and observe the green LEDs on A8 a If any of the green LEDs are off or flashing it is not likely that any of the assemblies listed above is causing the problem Continue to Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry m If all green LEDs are now on one or more of the above assemblies may be faulty Continue to next step Switch off the analyzer Reconnect W14 and W20 to A19 Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs a If the LEDs are off or blinking replace the A19 assembly a If the LEDs are still on continue to next step Switch off the analyzer Reconnect A18W1 to the A19 assembly 10 Switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs a If the LEDs are off replace the A18 display a If the LEDs are still on continue with the next step Switch off the analyzer Reinstall each assembly one at a time Switch on the analyzer after each assembly is installed The assembly that causes the green LEDs to go off or flash could be faulty Note It is possible however that this condition is caused by the A8 pos
164. group consists of the A4 A5 A6 sampler mixers and the A10 digital IF The A 12 reference assembly and the A9 CPU are also related The receiver measures and processes input signals for display The following pages describe the operation of each of the functional groups Power Supply Theory The power supply functional group consists of the A15 preregulator and the A8 post regulator These two assemblies comprise a switching power supply that provides regulated DC voltages to power all assemblies in the analyzer The A15 preregulator is enclosed in a casting at the rear of the instrument behind the display It is connected to the A8 post regulator by a wire bus A15W1 Figure 12 2 is a simplified block diagram of the power supply group Figure PSBLK12 here Figure 12 2 Power Supply Functional Group Simplified Block Diagram A15 Preregulator The A15 preregulator steps down and rectifies the line voltage It provides a fully regulated 5 V digital supply and several preregulated voltages that go to the A8 post regulator assembly for additional regulation The A15 preregulator assembly includes the line power module a 60 kHz switching preregulator and overvoltage protection for the 5 V digital supply It provides LEDs visible from the rear of the instrument to indicate either normal or shutdown status 12 4 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Line Power Module The line power module includes the line power switch volta
165. harmonic signals is 1 MHz below the start signal set from the front panel 3 The A3 source is pretuned The source RF OUT is fed to the A4 sampler The pretune DAC in the All phase lock assembly sets the A3 source to a first approximation frequency 1 to 6 MHz higher than the start frequency This signal RF OUT goes to the A4 R input sampler mixer assembly 4 The synthesizer signal and the source signal are combined by the sampler A difference frequency is generated In the A4 sampler the 1st LO signal from the pulse generator is combined with the RF OUT signal The IF intermediate frequency produced is a first approximation of 1 MHz This signal 1st IF is routed back to the A11 phase lock assembly DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 13 3 21 106 15 14 5 The difference frequency 1st IF from the A4 sampler is compared to a reference The 1st IF feedback signal from the A4 is filtered and applied to a phase comparator circuit in the All phase lock assembly The other input to the phase comparator is a crystal controlled 1 MHz signal from the A12 reference assembly Any frequency difference between these two signals produces a proportional error voltage 6 A tuning signal YO DRIVE tunes the source and phase lock is achieved The error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator in order to bring it closer to the required frequency The loop process continues until the 1st IF feedback signal to the phase comparator is equal to t
166. he 1 MHz reference signal and phase lock is achieved 7 A synthesized subsweep is generated by A13 A14 The A3 source tracks the synthesizer When the source is phase locked to the synthesizer at the start frequency the synthesizer starts to sweep The phase locked loop forces the source to track the synthesizer maintaining a constant 1 MHz Ist IF signal The full high band sweep is generated in a series of subsweeps by phase locking the A3 source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional N VCO The 16 to 31 MHz subsweep is produced by a one half harmonic using the divide by 2 circuit on the A14 assembly At the transitions between subsweeps the source is pretuned and then relocks Table 12 3 lists the high band subsweep frequencies from the fractional N VCO and the RF output Figure HBBLK12 here Figure 12 5 High Band Operation of the Source 12 14 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Table 12 3 High Band Subsweep Frequencies Fractional N MHz Harmonic RF Output MHz 30 to 60 1 2 16 to 31 30 to 60 1 31 to 61 30 to 60 2 61 to 121 40 to 59 3 121 to 178 35 4 to 59 2 5 178 to 296 32 8 to 59 4 9 296 to 536 35 7 to 59 5 15 536 to 893 33 0 to 59 5 27 893 to 1607 31 5 to 58 8 51 1607 to 3000 Option 006 37 0 to 59 6 83 3000 to 4950 49 0 to 59 4 101 4950 to 6000 Source Operation in other Modes Features Besides the normal network analyzer mode the HP 8753D Option 011 has extra mo
167. he counter can also be enabled to count the VCO frequency in CW mode Figure NODE29 here Figure 10 15 Analog Bus Node 29 10 36 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Node 30 FN VCO Det A14 VCO detector Perform step A14 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 50 xi RESOLUTION HIGH SCALE REF 50 k m See whether the FN VCO is oscillating The trace should resemble Figure 10 16 Figure NODE30 here Figure 10 16 Analog Bus Node 30 Node 31 Count Gate analog bus counter gate Perform step A14 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 31 x1 SCALE REF 2 1 You should see a flat line at 5 V The counter gate activity occurs during bandswitches and therefore is not visible on the analog bus To view the bandswitch activity look at this node on an oscilloscope using AUX OUT ON Refer to AUX OUT on OFF under the Analog Bus Menu heading PEEK POKE Menu To access this menu press SERVICE MENU PEEK POKE PEEK POKE Accesses different memory locations to view or change the contents The keys are described below Caution The PEEK POKE capability is intended for service use only PEEK POKE ADDRESS Accesses any memory address and shows it in the active entry area PEEL D of the display Use the front panel knob entry keys or step keys to enter the memory address of interest PEEK PEEK Displays the data at the accessed memory address POKE POKEI D Allows you to cha
168. he target spur will appear in many variations Often it will be difficult to identify positively occasionally it will be nearly impossible to identify Do not hesitate to press CONTINUE as many times as necessary to thoroughly inspect the current span The target spur usually appears as one of a group of four evenly spaced spurs as in Figure 3 12 The target spur is on the right most spur fourth from the left On any particular sweep one any or all of the spurs may be large small visible invisible above or below the reference line Figure TARGET 1 here Figure 3 12 Typical Display of Four Spurs without a Filter 3 30 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 On occasion the largest spur appears as one of a group of five evenly spaced spurs as shown in Figure 3 13 The target spur is again the fourth from the left not the fifth right most spur Figure TARGET2 here Figure 3 13 Target Spur in Display of Five Spurs Figure 3 14 shows another variation of the basic four spur pattern some up some down and the target spur itself almost indistinguishable Figure TARGETS here Figure 3 14 Target Spur Almost Invisible DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 31 3 21 106 15 11 9 Rotate the front panel knob to position the marker on the target spur Then press SELECT and observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE you have completed this
169. hink the problem is in the analyzer These are simple procedures to verify the four functional groups in sequence and determine which group is faulty The four functional groups are m power supplies a digital control E source E receiver Descriptions of these groups are provided in Chapter 12 Theory of Operation The checks in the following pages must be performed in the order presented If one of the procedures fails it is an indication that the problem is in the functional group checked Go to the troubleshooting information for the indicated group to isolate the problem to the defective assembly Figure 4 3 illustrates the troubleshooting organization Figure TO4 here Figure 4 3 Troubleshooting Organization 4 8 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Power Supply Check the Rear Panel LEDs Switch on the analyzer Notice the condition of the two LEDs on the A15 preregulator at rear of the analyzer See Figure 4 4 m The upper red LED should be off m The lower green LED should be on Figure REARLEDA here Figure 4 4 A15 Preregulator LEDs Check the A8 Post Regulator LEDs Remove the analyzer s top cover Switch on the power Inspect the green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator assembly a All green LEDs should be on m The fan should be audible In case of difficulty refer to Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 9 3 21 1
170. his voltage is used in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low resolution circuitry Node 11 Aux Input rear panel input Perform step A10 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 1 1 a This selects the rear panel AUX INPUT to drive the analog bus for voltage and frequency measurements It can be used to look at test points within the instrument using the analyzer s display as an oscilloscope Connect the test point of interest to the rear panel AUX INPUT BNC connector This feature can be useful if an oscilloscope is not available Also it can be used for testing voltage controlled devices by connecting the driving voltage of the device under test to the AUX IN connector Look at the driving voltage on one display channel while displaying the S parameter response of the test device on the other display channel With AUX OUT switched ON you can examine the analyzer s analog bus nodes with external equipment see AUX OUT on OFF under the Analog Bus Menu heading For HP IB considerations see HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions located later in this chapter Node 12 A10 Gnd ground reference This node is used in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment as a reference for calibrating the analog bus low and high resolution circuitry 10 26 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 A11 Phase Lock To observe the All analog
171. ications the Green LED and Red LED The green LED is on in normal operation It is off when line power is not connected not switched on or set too low or if the line fuse has blown The red LED which is off in normal operation lights to indicate a fault in the 5 V supply This may be an over under line voltage over line current or overtemperature condition Refer to the troubleshooting chapters for more information A8 Post Regulator The A8 post regulator filters and regulates the DC voltages received from the A15 preregulator It provides fusing and shutdown circuitry for individual voltage supplies It distributes regulated constant voltages to individual assemblies throughout the instrument It includes the overtemperature shutdown circuit the variable fan speed circuit and the air flow detector Nine green LEDs provide status indications for the individual voltage supplies Refer to the Power Supply Block Diagram located at the end of Chapter 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting to see the voltages provided by the A8 post regulator Voltage Indications the Green LEDs The nine green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 assembly are on in normal operation to indicate the correct voltage is present in each supply If they are off or flashing a problem is DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 5 3 21 106 15 14 indicated The troubleshooting procedures later in this chapter detail the steps to trace the cause of the problem Shutdown Ci
172. icing unless you are qualified to do so Warning The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened Warning The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply Caution Many of the assemblies in this instrument are very susceptible to damage from ESD electrostatic discharge Perform the following procedures only at a static safe workstation and wear a grounding strap 14 2 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Procedures described in this chapter The following pages describe assembly replacement procedures for the HP 8753D Option 011 assemblies listed below a Line Fuse m Covers a Front Panel Assembly Rear Panel Assembly Type N Connector Assembly m Al Keyboard m A2 Front Panel Interface A3 Source Assembly A4 A5 A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator A8 A10 All A12 A13 A14 Card Cage Boards A9 CPU Board A9BT1 Battery m A15 Preregulator m A16 Rear Panel Interface A17 Motherboard Assembly A18 Display m A19 Graphics Processor A20 Disk Drive A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 a Bl Fan DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 3 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Line Fuse Tools Required m small slot screwdriver Removal Warning For continued protection aga
173. ics of devices and networks A network analyzer test system consists of the following m source m signal separation devices m receiver a display The analyzer applies a signal that is either transmitted through the device under test or reflected from its input and then compares it with the incident signal generated by the swept RF source The signals are then applied to a receiver for measurement signal processing and display The HP 8753D Option 011 vector network analyzer integrates a high resolution synthesized RF source and a dual channel three input receiver to measure and display magnitude phase and group delay of transmitted and reflected power The HP 8753D Option 010 has the additional capability of transforming measured data from the frequency domain to the time domain Figure 12 1 is a simplified block diagram of the network analyzer system A detailed block diagram of the analyzer is located at the end of Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 1 3 21 106 15 14 Figure SIMBLK12 here Figure 12 1 Simplified Block Diagram of the Network Analyzer System The Built In Synthesized Source The analyzer s built in synthesized source produces a swept RF signal in the range of 300 kHz to 3 0 GHz The HP 8753D Option 006 is able to generate signals from 30 kHz to 6 GHz The RF output power is leveled by an internal ALC automatic leveling control circuit To achieve frequency accuracy and phase
174. idual node Refer to the Overall Block Diagram in the Start Troubleshooting chapter to see where the nodes are located in the instrument The analog bus consists of a source section and a receiver section The source can be the following m any one of the 31 nodes described in Analog Bus Nodes m the A14 fractional N VCO m the A14 fractional N VCO divided down to 100 kHz The receiver portion can be the following m the main ADC m the frequency counter When analog bus traces are displayed frequency is the x axis For a linear x axis in time switch to CW time mode or sweep a single band The Main ADC The main ADC is located on the A10 digital IF assembly and makes voltage measurements in two ranges See RESOLUTION under Analog In Menu 10 16 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 The Frequency Counter The frequency counter is located on the A14 assembly and can count one of three sources m selected analog bus node m A14 fractional N VCO FRAC N a A14 fractional N VCO divided down to 100 kHz DIV FRAC N frequency range is 100 kHz to 16 MHz The counts are triggered by the phase lock cycle one each at pretune acquire and track for each bandswitch The service mode SOURCE PLL must be ON for the counter to be updated at each bandswitch The counter works in swept modes or in CW mode It can be used in conjunction with SERVICE MODES for troubleshooting phase lock and s
175. ing wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Disconnect W30 from the high stability frequency reference board A26 3 Remove the BNC connector nut and washer from the 10 MHz PRECISION REFERENCE connector item 1 on the rear panel 4 Remove the screw item 2 that secures the high stability frequency reference board A26 to the bracket 5 Slide the board out of the bracket Be careful not to lose the plastic spacer washer item 3 that is on the BNC connector as the board is being removed Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note Before reinserting the high stability frequency reference board A26 into the bracket be sure the plastic spacer washer item 3 is on the BNC connector 14 48 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 49 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures B1 Fan Tools Required m 2 5 mm hex key driver a T 10 TORX screwdriver a T 15 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Remove the rear panel refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Disconnect the fan harness B1W1 from the motherboard A17J5 3 Remove the four screws and washers item 1 that secure the fan B1 Replacement m Reverse the order of the
176. inst fire hazard replace fuse only with same type and rating 3 A 250 V F The use of other fuses or materials is prohibited 1 Disconnect the power cord 2 Use a small slot screwdriver to pry open the fuse holder 3 Replace the blown fuse with a 3 A 250 V F fuse HP part number 2110 0708 Replacement m Simply replace the fuse holder 14 4 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Line Fuse Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 5 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Covers Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver a T 15 TORX screwdriver a T 20 TORX screwdriver Removing the top cover 1 Remove both upper rear feet item 1 by loosening the attaching screws item 2 2 Loosen the top cover screw item 3 3 Slide cover off Removing the side covers 1 Remove the top cover 2 Remove the lower rear foot item 4 that corresponds to the side cover you want to remove by loosening the attaching screw item 5 3 Remove the handle assembly item 6 by loosening the attaching screws item 7 4 Slide cover off Removing the bottom cover 1 Remove both lower rear feet item 4 by loosening the attaching screws item 5 2 Loosen the bottom cover screw item 8 3 Slide cover off 14 6 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Covers Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 7 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair
177. ion between subsweeps the source is pretuned and then relocks Table 12 2 lists the low band subsweep frequencies at the fractional N VCO and the RF output Table 12 2 Low Band Subsweep Frequencies Fractional N MHz 1st IF MHz RF Output MHz 40 3 to 43 3 0 3 to 3 3 0 3 to 3 3 43 3 to 56 0 3 3 to 16 0 3 3 to 16 0 12 12 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Source High Band Operation The high band frequency range is 16 MHz to 3 0 GHz or 16 MHz to 6 0 GHz with Option 006 These frequencies are generated in subsweeps by phase locking the A3 source signal to harmonic multiples of the fractional N VCO The high band subsweep sequence illustrated in Figure 12 5 follows these steps 1 A signal HI OUT is generated by the fractional N VCO The VCO in the A14 fractional N assembly generates a CW or swept signal in the range of 30 to 60 MHz This signal is synthesized and phase locked to a 100 kHz reference signal from the A12 reference assembly The signal from the fractional N VCO is divided by 1 or 2 and goes to the pulse generator 2 A comb of harmonics 1st LO is produced in the A7 pulse generator The divided down signal from the fractional N VCO drives a step recovery diode SRD in the A7 pulse generator assembly The SRD multiplies the fundamental signal from the fractional N into a comb of harmonic frequencies The harmonics are used as the lst LO local oscillator signal to the samplers One of the
178. ith Check the R A and B inputs 8 2 Receiver Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Check the R A and B inputs Good inputs produce traces similar to Figure 8 2 in terms of flatness To examine each input trace do the following 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8 1 The thru cable is HP part number 8120 4781 Figure SETUPS here Figure 8 1 Equipment Setup 2 Check the flatness of the input R trace by comparing it with the trace in Figure 8 2 Note The R trace will be 20 dB lower than the A and B trace due to the attenuator on the R input The flatness of the trace however should resemble that of the A and B input traces Press PRESET MEAS R SCALE REF AUTO SCALE 3 Check the flatness of the input trace by comparing it with the trace in Figure 8 2 Press MEAS A 4 Check the flatness of the input B trace by comparing it with the trace in Figure 8 2 Move the A input cable to the B input and press B m If none of the input traces resembles Figure 8 2 continue with Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad m If at least one input trace resembles Figure 8 2 continue with Troubleshooting When One or More Inputs Look Good DRAFT Receiver Troubleshooting 8 3 3 21 106 15 13 Figure GOODS here Figure 8 2 Typical Good Trace Troubleshooting When All Inputs Look Bad Run Internal Tests 18 and 17 l Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 18 EXECUTE TEST to
179. justment Procedures m If FAIL is displayed on the analyzer repeat the three Display Intensity Correction Constants Test 49 If the analyzer still fails the adjustment routine refer to the Start Troubleshooting Here chapter to isolate the problem 3 18 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 Required Equipment and Tools Power splitter cccccccccc eee erre rear rr e HP 11667A Option 001 RF cable 2 oo c ccc rr HP 11500B Antistatic wrist Strap e HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire sse HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up Time 30 minutes This adjustment routine measures the gain of the IF amplifiers A and B only located on the A10 digital IF to determine the correction constants for absolute amplitude accuracy 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 6 using the analyzer s A input Figure IFAMP here Figure 3 6 Setup for IF Amplifier Correction Constants 2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 51 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE 3 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 6 using the analyzer s B input DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 19 3 21 106 15 11 4 Press CONTINUE and observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m If DONE is displayed you have completed this procedure m If FAIL is displayed chec
180. k that the RF cables are connected from the power splitter to R input and A or B input Then repeat this adjustment routine a If the analyzer continues to fail the adjustment routine refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter 3 20 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes These correction constants improve the dynamic accuracy by shifting small signals to the most linear part of the ADC quantizing curve 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 52 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES Note This routine takes about three minutes 2 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor DONE you have completed this procedure m If the analyzer displays ADC Ofs Cor FAIL refer to the Digital Control chapter DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 21 3 21 106 15 11 Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 Required Equipment and Tools Power meter s cece eee een nen ete narrar aaa HP 437B or HP 438A Power sensor 6 ccc eee eee aee eee nee ene b ete nee eee eee ara HP 8482A Power sensor for Option 006 analyzers HP 8481A Power splitter 0 ccc cece cent nent rare HP 11667A Option 001 RF cable set 2 0 cisco HP 11500B HP IB cable 2 0 cece cence nnn been nene been eens HP 10833A Adapter type N m to type N M s HP P N 1250
181. kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 9 Receiver Input Crosstalk Frequency Range Specification Marker Value Measurement dB Uncertainty R into A Crosstalk 300 kHz 1 0 GHz 100 5 1 dB 1 0 GHz 3 0 GHz 90 5 1 dB R into B Crosstalk 300 kHz 1 0 GHz 100 5 1 dB 1 0 GHz 3 0 GHz 90 5 1 dB B into A Crosstalk 300 kHz 1 0 GHz 100 5 1 dB 1 0 GHz 3 0 GHz 90 5 1 dB A mto B Crosstalk 300 kHz 1 0 GHz 100 5 1 dB 1 0 GHz 3 0 GHz 90 5 1 dB 2a 12 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 12 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 10 Receiver Trace Noise CW Frequency Ratio Measured Value Specification Measurement GHz rms Uncertainty 3 A R lt 0 006 dB 0 001 dB 3 B R lt 0 006 dB 0 001 dB 3 A B lt 0 006 dB 0 001 dB 3 A B lt 0 0389 0 012 3 B R lt 0 0389 0 0 3 A R lt 0 038 0 01 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2a 13 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 13 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 11 Rec
182. ked loop operation 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 48 lt 1 EXECUTE TEST YES 2 Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays Pretune Cor DONE you have completed this procedure a If the analyzer displays FAIL refer to Source Troubleshooting DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 15 3 21 106 15 11 Display Intensity Correction Constants Test 49 Required Equipment and Tools Photometer 0 ccc cece erre rare nen n nent ennns Tektronix J16 photometer Probe erra era Tektronix J6503 Light occluder 2 0 0 0 cece eee renan Tektronix 016 0305 00 Antistatic wrist strap e HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire ss HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes Photometer warm up time 30 minutes There are three display intensity adjustments a background maximum m operating default If either the A19 GSP A9 CPU or A18 display assemblies are replaced perform a visual inspection of the display If it appears to need an adjustment then proceed with the following procedures Note This procedure should be performed with a photometer and only by qualified personnel 1 Set the photometer probe to NORMAL Press POWER on the photometer to switch it on to allow 30 minutes of warm up time Background Adjustment 2 In a dimly lit room or with the analyz
183. l ESF ESR without and with Cables 2 2 ee 11 9 11 4 Typical ERF ERR Without and With Cables o 11 10 11 5 Typical EXF EXR with 10 Hz Bandwidth and with 3 kHz Bandwidth o 11 11 11 6 Typical ELF ELR 2 ee eee 1 12 11 7 Typical ETF ETR 11 10 Tables 11 1 Calibration Coefficient Terms and Tests Loe 11 5 11 2 Uncorrected System Performance of HP 8753D 500 with 7 mm Test Ports 11 7 Contents 2 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 11 Error Terms The analyzer generates and stores factors in internal arrays when a measurement error correction measurement calibration is performed These factors are known by the following terms m error terms a F terms a measurement calibration coefficients The analyzer creates error terms by measuring well defined calibration devices over the frequency range of interest and comparing the measured data with the ideal model for the devices The differences represent systematic repeatable errors of the analyzer system The resulting calibration coefficients are good representations of the systematic error sources for details on the various levels of error correction refer to the Optimizing Measurement Results chapter of the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User s Guide Fore details on the theory of error correction refer to the Application and Operation Concepts chapter of the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User s Guide Error Terms Can Also Serve a Diagnosti
184. l Locations Mnemonic A13 Location A14 Location CST none TP3 L FNHOLD P2 2 P2 2 FNBIAS P2 5 P2 5 API P2 32 P2 32 API2 P2 3 P2 3 API3 P2 34 P2 34 API4 P2 4 P2 4 API5 P2 35 P2 35 NLATCH P1 28 P1 58 7 26 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Figure DCS7 here Figure 7 21 A14 Generated Digital Control Signals H MB Line This signal is active during the 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep The upper trace of Figure 7 22 shows relative inactivity of this signal during preset condition The lower trace shows its status during a 16 MHz to 31 MHz sweep with inactivity during retrace only Figure MBS7 here Figure 7 22 H MB Signal at A14P 1 5 Preset and 16 MHz to 31 MHz Sweep DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 27 3 21 106 15 13 A7 Pulse Generator Check The pulse generator affects phase lock in high band only It can be checked with either a spectrum analyzer or an oscilloscope A7 Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer 1 Remove the A7 to A6 SMB cable W7 from the A7 pulse generator assembly Set the analyzer to generate a 16 MHz CW signal Connect the spectrum analyzer to the A7 output connector and observe the signal The A7 comb should resemble the spectral display in Figure 7 23 Figure PGO7 here Figure 7 23 Pulse Generator Output 2 If the analyzer malfunction relates to a particular frequency or range look more closely at the comb tooth there Adjust the spectrum analyzer span and bandwidth as
185. lay or if the analyzer fails the checks replace the source 2 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 Follow the instructions for this procedure given in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants The procedure is complete when DONE appears on the analyzer display Use a power meter to verify that power levels are now correct If power levels are not correct or if the analyzer fails the routine proceed with step 3 3 Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 Follow the instructions for this procedure given in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants The procedure is complete when DONE appears on the analyzer display Next repeat step 2 If the analyzer fails the routine in step 2 replace the source If the analyzer fails the routine in step 3 replace the source DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 3 3 21 106 15 13 Phase Lock Error Figure PLE7 here Figure 7 1 Basic Phase Lock Error Troubleshooting Equipment Setup Troubleshooting tools include the assembly location diagram and phase lock diagnostic tools The assembly location diagram is on the underside of the instrument top cover The diagram shows major assembly locations and RF cable connections The phase lock diagnostic tools are explained in the Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix and should be used to troubleshoot phase lock problems The equipment setup shown in Figure 7 1 can be used throughout this
186. lows 0 pass 1 fail 2 m progress 3 not available 4 not done 5 done DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 41 3 21 106 15 14 Error Messages This section contains an alphabetical list of the error messages that pertain to servicing the analyzer The information in the list includes explanations of the displayed messages and suggestion to help solve the problem Note The error messages that pertain to measurement applications are included in the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User s Guide BATTERY FAILED STATE MEMORY CLEARED Error Number The battery protection of the non volatile CMOS memory has 183 failed The CMOS memory has been cleared See Chapter 14 for battery replacement instructions Refer to Chapter 12 of the HP 8753D Network Analyzer User s Guide for more information about the CMOS memory BATTERY LOW STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK Error Number The battery protection of the non volatile CMOS memory is in 184 danger of failing If this occurs all of the instrument state registers stored in CMOS memory will be lost Save these states to a disk and see Chapter 14 for battery replacement instructions Refer to Chapter 12 of the HP 8753D Network Analyzer User s Guide for more information about the CMOS memory CALIBRATION ABORTED Error Number You have changed the active channel during a calibration so the 74 calibration in progress was terminated Make sure the appropriate chann
187. lure in the source or you have 179 attempted to set the power level too high Check to see if the power level you set is within specifications If it is refer to Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting You will only receive this message over the HP IB On the analyzer P is displayed DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 47 3 21 106 15 14 POW MET INVALID Error Number The power meter indicates an out of range condition Check the 116 test setup POW MET NOT SETTLED Error Number Sequential power meter readings are not consistent Verify that the 118 equipment is set up correctly If so preset the instrument and restart the operation POW MET not on not connected wrong addrs Error Number The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer Verify that 117 the power meter address and model number set in the analyzer match the address and model number of the actual power meter POWER SUPPLY HOT Error Number The temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly have 21 detected an over temperature condition The power supplies regulated on the post regulator have been shut down POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN Error Number One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly have been 22 shut down due to an over current over voltage or under voltage condition PRINTER error Error Number The parallel port printer is malfunctioning The analyzer cannot 175 complete the copy function PRINTE
188. m If the adjustment is necessary follow these steps a Remove the upper rear bumpers and top cover using a torx screwdriver b Adjust the VCO tune A12 C85 to position the left half of the trace to 0 125 mV This is a very sensitive adjustment where the trace could easily go off of the screen c Adjust the HBLB A12 R68 to position the right half of the trace 125 to 175 mV about 1 to 1 5 divisions higher than the left half m Refer to Source Troubleshooting if you cannot perform the adjustment How to Set Up the Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment 1 Press PRESET SEQUENCE X APIADJ where X is the sequence number 2 Remove the upper rear corner bumpers and the top cover using a torx screwdriver 3 Follow the directions on the analyzer display and make all of the API adjustments Sequence Contents Sequence for the High Low Band Transition Adjustment Sequence HBLBADJ sets the hi band to low band switch point PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON START 11 M u STOP 21 M u MEAS ANALOG IN 22 x1 A12 GND DISPLAY DATA gt MEM DATA MEM MEAS ANALOG IN 23 x1 VCO TUNE MKR 11 M u DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 59 3 21 106 15 11 SCALE REF 1 x1 Sequences for the Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment Sequence FNADJ sets up A14 FRAC N Digital VCO DISPLAY DUAL CHAN ON SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MENU NUMBER OF POINTS 11 x1
189. matically switched off The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated When this occurs press MENU POWER and enter a lower power level Press POWER TRIP OFF to switch on the power again Faulty Data Any trace data that appears to be below the noise floor of the analyzer 100 dBm is indicative of a receiver failure DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 17 3 21 106 15 12 Accessories If the analyzer has passed all of the above checks but is still making incorrect measurements suspect the system accessories Accessories such as RF or interconnect cables calibration and verification kit devices adapters and test sets can all induce system problems Reconfigure the system as it is normally used and reconfirm the problem Continue with Chapter 9 Accessories Troubleshooting Accessories Error Messages m POWER PROBE SHUT DOWN The biasing supplies to a front panel powered device like a probe or millimeter module are shut down due to excessive current draw Troubleshoot the device 4 18 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 DRAFT Start Troubleshooting Here 4 19 3 21 106 15 12 oversized art 08753 90261 egs sg614d hpg Figure 4 10 HP 8753D Option 011 Overall Block Diagram 4 20 Start Troubleshooting Here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Contents 5 Power Supply Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence Simplified Block Dia
190. mblies can operate during troubleshooting when other supplies do not work Probe Power The 18 V and 18 V supplies are post regulated to 15 V and 12 6 V to provide a power source at the front panel for an external RF probe or milli meter modules Digital Control Theory The digital control functional group consists of the following assemblies m Al front panel m A front panel processor A9 CPU a A10 digital IF m Al6 rear panel a A18 display m A19 GSP These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the entire analyzer and HP 85047A and 85046A B S parameter test set They provide math processing functions as well 12 6 Theory of Operation DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 as communications between the analyzer and an external controller and or peripherals Figure 12 3 is a simplified block diagram of the digital control functional group Figure DIBLK12 here Figure 12 3 Digital Control Group Simplified Block Diagram A1 Front Panel The Al front panel assembly provides user interface with the analyzer It includes the keyboard for local user inputs and the front panel LEDs that indicate instrument status The RPG rotary pulse generator is not electrically connected to the front panel but provides user inputs directly to the front panel processor A2 Front Panel Processor The A2 front panel processor detects and decodes user inputs from the front panel and the RPG and transmits them to the CPU It has the cap
191. mechanical transfer switch in the S parameter test sets so the switch can be a source of error However most switch failures are not subtle no action Connect the test set to the analyzer Press PRESET MEAS Refil REV S22 B R and then Refl FWD Sii A R Listen for the sound of the switch m No sound confirm that the test set has a solid state noiseless switch then refer to Test Set Troubleshooting to locate the problem m Audible sound continue with this section unless a subtle failure is suspected To troubleshoot subtle failures refer to the test set manual Inspect the Error Terms Error terms are a measure of a system a network analyzer calibration kit and any cables used As required refer to Chapter 11 Error Terms for the following m The specific measurement calibration procedure used to generate the error terms m The routines required to extract error terms from the instrument a Typical error term data Use Table 9 1 to cross reference error term data to system faults DRAFT Accessories Troubleshooting 9 3 3 21 106 15 13 Table 9 1 Components Related to Specific Error Terms Component Directivity Source Reflection Isolation Load Transmission Match Tracking Match Tracking Calibration Kit load x open short X X Test Set connectors X X X X X X bridge X X X X X X bias tee X X X X X transfer switch X X X X X step attenuator X X X X power
192. motherboard connector or extender board but keep the cable A15W1 connected to A8 see Figure 5 5 Connect a jumper wire between A8TP3 and chassis ground Switch on the analyzer s If all the green LEDs on the top edge of A8 light except 5 VD replace the fan a If other green LEDs on A8 do not light refer to If the Green LEDs on A8 are not All ON earlier in this procedure DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 19 3 21 106 15 12 Intermittent Problems PRESET states that appear spontaneously without pressing PRESET typically signal a power supply or A9 CPU problem Since the A9 CPU assembly is the easiest to substitute do so If the problem ceases replace the A9 If the problem continues replace the A15 preregulator assembly DRAFT 5 20 Power Supply Troubleshooting 3 21 106 15 12 oversized art 08753 90261 egs sg629d hpg Figure 5 8 Power Supply Block Diagram DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 21 3 21 106 15 12 Contents 7 Source Troubleshooting Assembly Replacement Sequence Before You Start Troubleshooting Power o 1 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 2 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 3 Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 Phase Lock Error Phase Lock Loop Error Message Check A4 Sampler Mixer Check A3 Source and All Phase Lock Check YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus YO Coil Drive Check with Oscilloscope A12 Refe
193. move from Card Cage None 4 A5 A Sampler Remove from Card Cage None 5 A6 B Sampler Remove from Card Cage None 6 A9 CPU Disconnect W35 and W36 A20 Disk Drive 7 A2 Front Panel Interface Disconnect W17 A1 Front Panel Keyboard 8 A16 Rear Panel Interface Disconnect W27 None 5 14 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 Inspect the Motherboard Inspect the A17 motherboard for solder bridges and shorted traces In particular inspect the traces that carry the supplies whose LEDs faulted when A8TP4 SDIS was grounded earlier DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 15 3 21 106 15 12 Error Messages Three error messages are associated with the power supplies functional group They are shown here m POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN One or more supplies on the A8 post regulator assembly is shut down due to one of the following conditions overcurrent overvoltage or undervoltage Refer to If the Red LED on A15 is ON earlier in this procedure m POWER SUPPLY HOT The temperature sensors on the A8 post regulator assembly detect an overtemperature condition The regulated power supplies on A8 have been shut down Check the temperature of the operating environment it should not be greater than 55 C 131 F The fan should be operating and there should be at least 15 cm 6 in spacing behind and all around the analyzer to allow for proper ventilation m PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN The front panel RF probe biasing
194. mplitude accuracy in the 30 dBm input power region ADC Ofs Cor Measures the A10 Digital IF ADC linearity characteristics using an internal ramp generator and stores values for the optimal operating region During measurement IF signals are centered in the optimal region to improve low level dynamic accuracy Sampler Cor Measures the absolute amplitude response of the R sampler against an external power meter via HP IB then compares A and B magnitude and phase against R It improves the R input accuracy and A B R tracking Cav Osc Cor Calculates the frequency of the cavity oscillator and the instrument temperature for effective spur avoidance Serial Cor Stores the serial number input by the user in the Display Title menu in EEPROM This routine will not overwrite an existing serial number Option Cor Stores the option keyword required for Option 002 006 010 or any combination Cal Kit Def Not used Init EEPROM This test initializes the EEPROM Display Tests These tests do not return a PASS FAIL condition All six amber front panel LEDs will turn off if the test passes The display will be blank press PRESET to exit the test If any of the six LEDs remain on the test has failed 59 Disp cpu com Checks to confirm that the CPU can communicate with the A19 GSP board The CPU writes all zeros all ones and then a walking 1 pattern to the GSP and reads them back If the test fails the CPU repeats the walking 1
195. n Table 10 2 Main DRAM Verifies the A9 CPU main memory DRAM with a non destructive write read test pattern A destructive version is shown in Table 10 2 These tests internal tests 2 through 4 are normally run at preset and power on see NORMAL below However a jumper on the A9 CPU assembly illustrated in Figure 10 2 can be set in one of five positions with the following results Table 10 2 Descriptions of Jumper Positions Jumper Position Result Position No ALTER 1 With the jumper in this right position correction constants can be altered updated during adjustment procedures The altered correction constants are stored in EEPROM replacing previously stored correction constants CMOS 2 This destructive version of the CMOS RAM test internal test 3 continuously writes over information stored there DRAM 3 This destructive version of the main DRAM test internal test 4 continuously writes over information stored there SKIP 4 For factory use only NORMAL 5 The left position is the normal operation position 10 6 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 10 11 12 DRAFT 3 21 106 Figure JUMPLOC here Figure 10 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU Jumper positions 1 to 5 run right to left For additional information see Internal Tests near the front of this section and the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter DSP Wr Rd Verifies the ability o
196. n press MEAS ANALOG IN 23 1 TOP 20 m z MARKER FCTN SCALE REF AUTO SCALE The trace should show a voltage step as shown in Figure 10 14 If not refer to the High Low Band Transition Adjustment Figure NODE23 here Figure 10 14 Analog Bus Node 23 DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 33 3 21 106 15 14 Node 24 2nd LO Perform step Al2 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 24 x1 COUNTER ANALOG BUS MENU CW FREQ This node counts the 2nd LO used by the sampler mixer assemblies to produce the 2nd IF of 4 kHz As you vary the frequency the counter reading should change to values very close to those indicated below Frequency Entered Counter Reading 0 3 to 1 MHz frequency entered 4 kHz 1 to 16 MHz not accurate 16 to 3 000 MHz 996 kHz Node 25 PL Ref phase lock reference Perform step A12 above and then press ANALOG IN x1 COUNTER ANALOG BUS MENU CW FREQ This node counts the reference signal used by the phase comparator circuit on the All phase lock assembly As you vary the frequency the counter reading should change as indicated below Frequency Entered Counter Reading 0 3 to 1 MHz frequency entered 1 to 16 MHz not accurate 16 to 3 000 MHz 1 MHz 10 34 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Node 26 Ext Ref rear panel external reference input Perform step A12 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 26 x1
197. nalog Bus Node 18 Node 19 IF Det 2W IF after 16 MHz filter Perform step All above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 19 x1 MENU STOP 20 x1 SCALE REF 2 x1 REFERENCE VALUE x1 This node detects IF after the 16 MHz filter limiter The filter is used during pretune and acquire but not in band 1 Normal state is a flat line at about 1 7 V Node 20 IF Det 1 IF after 30 MHz filter Perform step All above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN 20 x1 SCALE REF 1 x1 The trace should be a flat line across the entire frequency band at least 0 5 V greater than Vbb node 14 The correct trace indicates the presence of IF after the first 30 MHz filter limiter A12 Reference To observe the A12 analog bus nodes perform step A12 below Then follow the node specific instructions Step A12 Press PRESET MEAS ANALOG IN MARKER SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON FORMAT MORE REAL DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 31 3 21 106 15 14 Node 21 100 kHz 100 kHz reference frequency Perform step A12 above and then press ANALOG IN x1 COUNTER ANALOG BUS This node counts the A12 100 kHz reference signal that is used on A13 the fractional N analog assembly as a reference frequency for the phase detector Node 22 A12 Gnd 1 ground 10 32 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Node 23 VCO Tune A12 VCO tuning voltage Perform Step A12 above and the
198. ng Enter in Analyzer 300 kHz dB minus dB equals dB 50 MHz dB minus dB equals dB 1 5 GHz dB minus dB equals dB 3 GHz dB minus dB equals dB 6 GHz dB minus dB equals dB 1 For Option 006 instruments only 13 Repeat the previous two steps at 50 MHz 1 5 GHz and 3 GHz 14 For Option 006 Instruments Only Make a measurement at 6 GHz by disconnecting the HP 8482A sensor A from the power splitter and replacing it with the HP 8481A sensor B a If you are using the HP 438A power meter the HP 8481A should be connected to the meter s channel B input a If you are using the HP 437B power meter zero and calibrate the HP 8481A sensor 15 Reconfigure the equipment as shown in Figure 3 3 16 For Option 006 Instruments Only Use the HP 8482A sensor A in the equipment configuration a If you are using the HP 438A power meter the HP 8482A should be connected to the meter s channel A input a If you are using the HP 437B power meter zero and calibrate the HP 8482A sensor Figure SETUPB here Figure 3 3 Setup B for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants 3 12 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 17 18 19 20 Repeat the measurements at the same frequencies 300 kHz 50 MHz 1 5 GHz 3 GHz and record the power meter readings in the second column in Table 3 2 For Option 006 Instruments Only Make a measurement at 6 GHz by disconnecting the HP 8
199. nge the data at the memory address accessed by the PEEK POKE ADDRESS softkey Use the front panel knob entry keys or step keys to change the data The A9CC jumper must be in the ALTER position in order to poke DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 37 3 21 106 15 14 RESET MEMORY Resets or clears the memory where instrument states are stored To do this press RESET MEMORY PRESET 10 38 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Firmware Revision Softkey Press SERVICE MENU FIRMWARE REVISION to display the current firmware revision information The number and implementation date appear in the active entry area of the display as shown in Figure 10 17 below The installed options are also displayed Another way to display the firmware revision information is to cycle the line power Figure FIRM here Figure 10 17 Location of Firmware Revision Information on Display DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 39 3 21 106 15 14 HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions All service routine keystrokes can be made through HP IB in one of the following approaches m sending equivalent remote HP IB commands Mnemonics have been documented previously with the corresponding keystroke m invoking the System Menu MENUSYST and using the analyzer mnemonic SOFTn where n represents the softkey number Softkeys are numbered 1 to 8 from top to bottom An HP IB overview is provided in the Compa
200. nstants 3 7 3 21 106 15 11 Analog Bus Correction Constant Test 46 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This procedure calibrates the analog bus by using three reference voltages ground 0 37 V and 2 5 V The calibration data is stored as correction constants in EEPROMs 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 46 1 EXECUTE TEST YES 2 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor DONE you have completed this procedure m If the analyzer displays ABUS Cor FAIL refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter 3 8 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 Required Equipment and Tools Power meter ee HP 437B or HP 438A Power sensor lt e nee ene een eens ed HP 8482A Power sensor for Option 006 analyzers 2 0 0 e teen eee nes HP 8481A Power splitter 2 0 cece cece cnt narco HP 11667A Option 001 Attenuator 20 JB HP 84914 Option 020 HP IB cable ss HP 10833A RF cable 24 inch cciicc css iss sirene career aerea arrancada HP 11500B Antistatic wrist strap ee HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire sse HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up Time 30 minutes This procedure adjusts several correction constants that can improve the output power level accuracy of the internal source They are related to the po
201. ocedures 4 Perform the necessary adjustments Refer to Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants 5 Perform the necessary performance tests Refer to Chapter 2 System Verification and Performance Tests Receiver Failure Error Messages The error messages which indicate receiver group problems may be caused by the instrument itself or by external devices or connections Remember that RF OUT must be connected to input R to maintain phase lock unless internal cables are moved The following three error messages share the same description m CAUTION OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED m CAUTION OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED m CAUTION OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED If any of the above error messages appear you have exceeded approximately 3 dBm at one of the input ports The RF output power is automatically turned off The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated To reset the analyzer s power and regain control of the power level do the following 1 Remove any devices under test which may have contributed excess power to the input 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 8 1 3 Press MENU POWER 0 x1 POWER TRIP OFF to return the power level to the preset state m If the power trip indicator P does not reappear reconfigure the test setup to keep input power levels at 0 dBm or below a If P reappears continue w
202. on cable W27 from the motherboard connector A17J6 pressing down and out on the connector locks The rear panel is now connected only by three flexible cables W21 W22 and W23 8 Remove the bracket item 5 that secures the graphics board A19 removing the two screws that attach it to the rear frame The preregulator is now sitting loosely in the instrument Gently press the top of the graphics board A19 towards the display A18 then lift up Disconnect the three flexible cables W21 W22 and W23 from the graphics board A19 The rear panel is now detached Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 14 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 Rear Panel Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 15 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures Type N Connector Assembly Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver m small slot screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap m 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in lb Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover refer to Covers in this chapter Remove the front panel refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter Remove the source bracket item 1 Disconnect the semi rigid cables W1 W2 W3 and W4 from the source and the samplers ao E WwW N Remove the two screws item 2 that secure the bracket item 3
203. oor of the instrument For factory use only Allows you to store the correction constants that reside in non volatile memory EEPROM onto a disk Correction constants improve instrument performance by compensating for specific operating variations due to hardware limitations refer to the Adjustments chapter Having this information on disk is useful as a backup in case the constants are lost due to a CPU board failure Without a disk backup the correction constants can be regenerated manually although the procedures are more time consuming Offsets the frequency of both the A3 YIG oscillator and the A3 cavity oscillator to avoid spurs which cannot otherwise be filtered out SPUR AVOID OFF allows examination of these spurs for service Enables and disables the analog bus described below Use it with the analog in menu described in the following pages Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 15 Analog Bus To access the analog bus press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON Description of the Analog Bus The analog bus is a single multiplexed line that networks 31 nodes within the instrument It can be controlled from the front panel or through HP IB to make voltage and frequency measurements just like a voltmeter oscilloscope or frequency counter The next few paragraphs provide general information about the structure and operation of the analog bus See Analog Bus Nodes below for a description of each indiv
204. or care and connection techniques are critical for accurate repeatable measurements Refer to the calibration kit documentation for connector care information Prior to making connections to the network analyzer carefully review the information about inspecting cleaning and gaging connectors Having good connector care and connection techniques extends the life of these devices In addition you obtain the most accurate measurements This type of information is typically located in Chapter 3 of the calibration kit manuals For additional connector care instruction contact your local Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office about course numbers HP 85050A 24A and HP 85050A 24D See the following table for quick reference tips about connector care DRAFT Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 3 21 106 15 06 1 5 Table 1 3 Connector Care Quick Reference Handling and Storage Do Do Not Keep connectors clean Touch mating plane surfaces Extend sleeve or connector nut Set connectors contact end down Use plastic end caps during storage Visual Inspection Do Do Not Inspect all connectors carefully Use a damaged connector ever Look for metal particles scratches and dents Connector Cleaning Do Do Not Try compressed air first Use any abrasives Use isopropyl alcohol Get liquid into plastic support beads Clean connector threads Gaging Connectors Do Do Not Clean and zero the ga
205. ore a calibration set due to insufficient memory You 70 can free more memory by clearing a saved instrument state from an internal register which may also delete an associated calibration set if all the instrument states using the calibration kit have been deleted You can store the saved instrument state and calibration set to a disk before clearing them After deleting the instrument states press PRESET to run the memory packer NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL Error Number When the analyzer is performing a power meter calibration the 198 HP IB bus is unavailable for other functions such as printing or plotting OVERLOAD ON INPUT A POWER REDUCED Error Number See error number 57 58 OVERLOAD ON INPUT B POWER REDUCED Error Number See error number 57 59 OVERLOAD ON INPUT R POWER REDUCED Error Number You have exceeded approximately 14 dBm at one of the test 57 ports The RF output power is automatically reduced to 85 dBm The annotation P appears in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been activated When this occurs reset the power to a lower level then toggle the SOURCE PWR on OFF softkey to switch on the power again PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO Error Number You have defined the parallel port as COPY for sequencing in the 165 HP IB menu To access the parallel port for general purpose I O GPIO set the selection to GPIO 10 46 Servi
206. orrection Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Figure HLADJ here Figure 3 22 High Low Band Adjustment Locations DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 49 3 21 106 15 11 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Required Equipment and Tools Spectrum analyzer cece cece eee tenn eee eee rara HP 8563E Power splitter 0 ccc cence eee nee een rear HP 11667A Option 001 Attenuator 10 JB HP 8491A Option 010 BNC cable 2 0 corro HP P N 8120 1840 HP IB cable cisne HP 10833A B C D RF cable set ooooooccccocccncoccn cc HP 11851B Non metallic adjustment tool s HP P N 8830 0024 TORX screwdriver T 15 Antistatic wrist strap e HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire ss HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment minimizes the spurs caused by the API analog phase interpolator on the fractional N assembly circuits It also improves the sideband characteristics 3 50 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 1 Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 3 23 2 Make sure the instruments are set to their default HP IB addresses HP 8753D Option 011 16 Spectrum Analyzer 18 Figure FRACSPUR here Figure 3 23 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment Setup 3 Set the spectrum analyzer measurement parameters as follows Reference Level 0 dBm Resolution Bandwidth
207. ost accurate error correction procedure Since the analyzer takes both forward and reverse sweeps this procedure takes more time than the other correction procedures 1 Set any measurement parameters that you want for the device measurement power format number of points IF bandwidth 2 To access the measurement correction menus press Gan 3 Assuming that your calibration kit is the m default press CAL KIT 7 MM RETURN 4 To select the correction type press CALIBRATE MENU FULL 2 PORI REFLECTION 5 Connect a shielded open circuit to PORT 1 11 2 Error Terms DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Figure FULLCAL here Figure 11 1 Standard Connections for Full Two Port Error Correction DRAFT Error Terms 11 3 3 21 106 15 14 11 12 13 14 To measure the standard when the displayed trace has settled press FORWARD OPEN The analyzer underlines the OPEN softkey after it measures the standard Disconnect the open and connect a short circuit to PORT 1 To measure the device when the displayed trace has settled press FORWARD SHORI The analyzer underlines the SHORT softkey after it measures the standard Disconnect the short and connect an impedance matched load to PORT 1 10 To measure the standard when the displayed trace has settled press FORWARD LOAD The analyzer underlines the LOAD softkey after it measures the standard Repeat the open short load measurements descried above but conne
208. ource problems To read the counter over HP IB use the command OUTPCNTR Notes m The display and marker units U correspond to volts m Nodes 17 1st IF and 24 2nd LO are unreliable above 1 MHz About 0 750 MHz is a typical counter reading with no AC signal present a Anything occurring during bandswitches is not visible a Fast moving waveforms may be sensitive to sweep time m The analog bus input impedance is about 50K ohms a Waveforms up to approximately 200 Hz can be reproduced Analog In Menu Select this menu to monitor voltage and frequency nodes using the analog bus and internal counter as explained below To switch on the analog bus and access the analog in menu press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MEAS ANALOG IN The RESOLUTION LOW key toggles between low and high resolution Resolution Maximum Signal Minimum Signal LOW 0 5 V 0 5 V HIGH 10 V 10 V DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 17 3 21 106 15 14 AUX OUT on OFF Allows you to monitor the analog bus nodes except nodes 1 2 3 4 9 10 12 with external equipment oscilloscope voltmeter etc To do this connect the equipment to the AUX INPUT BNC connector on the rear panel and press AUX OUT until ON is highlighted Caution To prevent damage to the analyzer first connect the signal to the rear panel AUX INPUT and then switch the function ON COUNTER OFF Switches the internal counter off and remove
209. ow Band Transition Frequency Accuracy EEPROM Backup Disk Frequency Range and Accuracy or System Verification A13 Fractional N Analog A9CC Jumper Positions Fractional N Spur and FM Sideband EEPROM Backup Disk Spectral Purity other spurious signals Frequency Range and Accuracy A14 Fractional N Digital A9CC Jumper Positions Fractional N Frequency Range EEPROM Backup Disk Frequency Range and Accuracy or System Verification A15 Preregulator None Self Test A16 Rear Panel None Internal Test 13 Interface Rear Panel A17 Motherboard None Self Test A18 Display Vertical Position and Focus only if needed Observation of Display Tests 66 80 A19 Graphics System Processor None Observation of Display Tests 59 80 3 4 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 11 A9 CC Jumper Positions 1 Remove the power line cord from the analyzer 2 Set the analyzer on its side 3 Remove the two lower rear corner bumpers from the bottom of the instrument with the T 10 TORX screwdriver 4 Loosen the captive screw on the bottom cover s back edge using a T 15 TORX screwdriver 5 Slide the cover toward the rear of the instrument 6 Move the jumper as shown in Figure 3 1 m Move the A9 CC jumper to the ALT position before you run any of the correction constant adjustment routines This is the position for altering the analyzer s correc
210. ower Limit Upper Limit MHz Uncertainty MHz MHz 10 49 496 50 496 N A 20 37 620 38 380 N A 100 49 005 49 995 N A 1 000 36 630 37 370 N A 3 000 58 216 59 392 N A 4 000 48 181 48 663 N A 5 000 43 470 43 905 N A 6 000 52 165 52 687 N A DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 9 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 8 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 6 Receiver Channel Noise Floor Level Frequency Range IF Bandwidth Specification Calculated Measurement ABm Value Uncertainty Receiver Channel A 300 kHz 3 0 GHz 3 kHz 90 N A 300 kHz 3 0 GHz 10 Hz 110 N A Receiver Channel B 300 kHz 3 0 GHz 10 Hz 110 N A 300 kHz 3 0 GHz 3 kHz 90 N A Receiver Channel B 3 0 GHz 6 0 GHz 3 kHz 85 N A 3 0 GHz 6 0 GHz 10 Hz 105 N A Receiver Channel A 3 0 GHz 6 0 GHz 10 Hz 105 N A 3 0 GHz 6 0 GHz 3 kHz 85 N A 2b 10 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 9 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option 006 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 7 Receiver Magnitude Frequency Response CW Fr
211. press NEXT 4 Press NEXT repeatedly Watch the trace on each sweep and try to spot the target spur With the filter the target spur will be one of two obvious spurs See Figure 3 11 Without the filter not recommended the target spur will be one of four or five less distinct spurs as shown in Figure 3 12 and Figure 3 13 When the center frequency increases to 2994 999 MHz and you have not selected the target spur Cav Osc Cor FAIL will appear on the display 3 28 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Figure TARGET here Figure 3 11 Typical Display of Spurs with a Filter Spur Search Procedure with a Filter 5 Press EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE and the other softkeys as required to observe and mark the target spur The target spur will appear to the right of a second spur similar to Figure 3 11 6 Rotate the front panel knob to position the marker on the spur and then press SELECT DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 29 3 21 106 15 11 7 Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays Cav Osc Cor DONE you have completed this procedure m If the analyzer does not display DONE repeat this procedure m If the analyzer continues not to display DONE refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter Spur Search Procedure without a Filter 8 Press EXECUTE TEST YES CONTINUE and the other softkeys as required to observe and mark the target spur T
212. quency 3 GHz 6 GHz HP 8481A A P S Parameter Test Set Frequency Range 3 6 GHz HP s5046Al HP 8504742 P for Option 006 3 GHz 6 GHz Transmission Reflection Test Set Frequency 300 kHz 3 GHz HP 85044A P Directivity 30 dB Tool Kit o substitute HP part number T 08753 60023 Photometer Tektronix J16 A Photometer Probe Tektronix J6503 A Light Occluder Tektronix 016 0305 00 CRT Demagnetizer or Bulk Tape Eraser A Printer HP ThinkJet DeskJet P LaserJet Floppy Disk 3 5 inch HP 92192A A Calibration Kit 7 mm No substitute HP 85031B P Calibration Kit Type N No substitute HP 85032B P Verification Kit 7 mm No substitute HP 85029B P Test Set HP 85046B 47B P Option 011 1 For use with HP 8753D Option 011 2 For use with HP 8753D Option 011 and 006 1 2 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 06 Table 1 2 Service Test Equipment 2 of 3 Required Critical Recommended Use Equipment Specifications Model Step Attenuator 110 dB Calibrated O 30 MHz 8496A P Attenuators fixed Return loss gt 32 dB 3 dB Type 8491A Opt 003 P 20 dB Type 8491A Opt 020 A P T 10 dB Type 8491A Opt 010 A P 30 dB Type 8491A Opt 030 A P RF Cable Type P N 8120 4721 A RF Cable Set 12 inch phase matched 11500B A RF Cable Kit Qty 3 50 Type N m matched 11851B A P RF Cable Set 50 7 mm 85029B P RF Cable 24 inch APC 7 P N 8120 4779 P RF Cable 5
213. quency doubler to double the HP 8753 source frequency portion of the RF signal is coupled to the analyzer R input for reference For an HP 8753D Option 011 combined with Option 006 the frequency doubler is bypassed since the analyzer s source is capable of generating a swept RF signal up to 6 GHz The remaining signal is routed through a 70 dB programmable step attenuator to the directional couplers for reflection and transmission measurements The couplers allow detection of the signal from 300 kHz to 6 GHz These couplers provide low insertion loss between the RF input and the test ports Two bias tees supply external biasing for active devices An HP 8753D Option 006 011 is required for use with the HP 85047A test set Figure 12 9a shows a simplified block diagram of the HP 85047A The HP 85046A B S parameter test set contains a power splitter to divert a portion of the incident signal to the R input of the analyzer for reference The remainder of the incident signal is routed through a switch to one of two directional bridges at the measurement ports The RF path switch is controlled by the analyzer to enable switching between forward and reverse measurements A 70 dB step attenuator in the test set also controlled from the analyzer adjusts the power level to the DUT without changing the level of the incident power in the reference path Two bias tees are included for external biasing of active devices connected to the test ports Figure
214. r Magnitude and Phase CC Test 53 ADC Linearity CC Test 52 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 Cavity Oscillator Frequency CC Test 54 EEPROM Backup Disk Replaced Adjustments Verification Assembly Correction Constants CC A9 cpul A9CC Jumper Positions Output Power Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Frequency Response Dynamic Accuracy or System Verification Firmware Rev 5 20 08753 60185 A9CC Jumper Positions Source Default CC 9 Test 44 Pretune Default CC Test 45 Analog Bus CC Test 46 RF Output Power CC Test 47 Source Pretune CC Test 48 Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 47 EEPROM Backup Disk Internal Test 0 A10 Digital IF A9CC Jumper Positions Analog Bus CC Test 46 Sampler Magnitude and Phase CC Test 53 ADC Linearity CC Test 52 IF Amplifier CC Test 51 EEPROM Backup Disk Receiver Noise Level Trace Noise Input Crosstalk Absolute Amplitude Accuracy or System Verification A11 Phase Lock A9CC Jumper Positions Analog Bus CC Test 46 Source Pretune CC Test 48 EEPROM Backup Disk Minimum R Level Frequency Accuracy 1 If you have an EEPROM backup disk available you only need to perform the first three tests listed DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 3 Table 3 1 Related Service Procedures 3 of 3 Replaced Assembly Adjustments Correction Constants CC Verification A12 Reference A9CC Jumper Positions High L
215. r output detector Perform step A3 above to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press MEAS ANALOG IN 7 x1 SCALE REF AUTO SCALE Node 7 displays the output of a logger circuit in the ALC loop The trace should be a linear ramp Absolute voltage level variations are normal Flat segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between 15 dBm and 10 dBm The proper waveform at node 7 indicates that the circuits in the A3 source ALC loop are normal and the source is leveled Figure NODE7 here Figure 10 9 Analog Bus Node 7 Node 8 A3 Gnd ground DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 25 3 21 106 15 14 A10 Digital IF To observe the A10 analog bus nodes perform step A10 below Then follow the node specific instructions Step A10 Press PRESET MEAS ANALOG IN MARKER SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON FORMAT MORE REAL Node 9 0 37 V 0 37 V reference Perform step A10 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN RESOLUTION HIGH 9 x1 Check for a flat line at approximately 0 37V This is used as the voltage reference in the Analog Bus Correction Constants adjustment procedure The voltage level should be the same in high and low resolution the absolute level is not critical Node 10 2 50 V 2 50 V reference Perform step A10 above and then press MEAS ANALOG IN RESOLUTION LOW 10 x1 SCALE REF 1 x1 Check for a flat line at approximately 2 5 V T
216. r to the product warranty providing three years of repair coverage Option W51 This option adds four years of on site repair to the product warranty providing five years of repair coverage Option W32 This option provides three years of return to HP calibration service Option W52 This option provides five years of return to HP calibration service Option W34 This option provides three years of return to HP Standards Compliant Calibration 1 8 Service Equipment and Analyzer Options DRAFT 3 21 106 15 06 Option W54 This option provides five years of return to HP Standards Compliant Calibration If support was not purchased along with the analyzer there are many repair and calibration options available from Hewlett Packard s support organization These options cover a range of on site services and agreements with varying response times as well as return to HP agreements and per incident pricing Contact your local Hewlett Packard customer engineer Tor details DRAFT Service Equipment and Analyzer Options 1 9 3 21 106 15 06 Contents 2a Performance Test Record For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz 2a 1 DRAFT Contents 1 3 21 106 15 21 2a Performance Test Record For Analyzers with a Frequency Range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz Note See the next Performance Test Record section if your analyzer frequency range is from 30 kHz to 6 GHz Option 006 DRAFT Performance Test Re
217. rcuit The shutdown circuit is triggered by overcurrent overvoltage undervoltage or overtemperature It protects the instrument by causing the regulated voltage supplies to be shut down It also sends status messages to the A9 CPU to trigger warning messages on the analyzer display The voltages that are not shut down are the 5VD and 5VCPU digital supplies from the preregulator the fan supplies the probe power supplies and the display supplies The shutdown circuit can be disabled momentarily for troubleshooting purposes by using a jumper to connect the SDIS line A8TP4 to ground Variable Fan Circuit and Air Flow Detector The fan power is derived directly from the 18 V and 18 V supplies from the A15 preregulator The fan is not fused so that it will continue to provide airflow and cooling when the instrument is otherwise disabled If overheating occurs the main instrument supplies are shut down and the fan runs at full speed An overtemperature status message is sent to the A9 CPU to initiate a warning message on the analyzer display The fan also runs at full speed if the air flow detector senses a low output of air from the fan Full speed is normal at initial power on Display Power The A8 assembly supplies voltages to the display through a wire cable The A8 supplies 5VCPU and 65 V to the A19 GSP then the 65 V is routed to the display They are not connected to the protective shutdown circuitry so that the A18 display asse
218. re probability factor to each assembly DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 5 3 21 106 15 14 Test Descriptions The analyzer has up to 80 routines that test verify and adjust the instrument This section describes those tests Internal Tests This group of tests runs without external connections or operator interaction All return a PASS or FAIL condition All of these tests run on power up and PRESET except as noted 0 ALL INT Runs only when selected It consists of internal tests 3 11 13 16 and 20 Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed If all pass the test displays a PASS status Each test in the subset retains its own test status PRESET Runs the following subset of internal tests first the ROM RAM tests 2 3 and 4 then tests 5 through 11 14 15 and 16 If any of these tests fail this test returns a FAIL status Use the front panel knob to scroll through the tests and see which failed If all pass this test displays a PASS status Each test in the subset retains its own test status This same subset is available over HP IB as TST It is not performed upon remote preset ROM Part of the ROM RAM tests and cannot be run separately Refer to the Digital Control Troubleshooting chapter for more information CMOS RAM Verifies the A9 CPU CMOS long term memory with a non destructive write read pattern A destructive version that writes over stored data is shown i
219. rence Check Analog Bus Method Oscilloscope Method 100 kHz Pulses PLREF Waveforms REF Signal At A11TP1 Pin 9 High Band REF Signal Low Band REF Signal FN LO at A12 Check 4 MHz Reference Signal 2ND LO Waveforms 90 Degree Phase Offset of ond LO Signals i in High Band In Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band A12 Digital Control Signals Check LENREF Line o L HB and L LB Lines A13 A14 Fractional N Check Fractional N Check with Analog Bus A14 VCO Range Check with Oscilloscope A14 VCO Exercise Al4 Divide by N Circuit Check Loe Al4 to A13 Digital Control Signals Check H MB Line a AT Pulse Generator Check AT Pulse Generator Check with Spectrum Analyzer Rechecking the A13 A14 Fractional N AT Pulse Generator Check with Oscilloscope All Phase Lock Check Loe Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 7 2 7 2 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 7 4 7 4 7 6 1 7 7 10 7 11 7 11 7 12 7 13 7 14 7 15 7 15 7 15 7 16 7 17 7 18 7 19 7 19 7 20 7 21 7 21 7 22 7 22 7 22 7 23 7 24 7 26 7 26 7 27 7 28 7 28 7 29 7 30 7 31 7 32 Contents 1 Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination lc 7 32 Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix Loe ee 7 34 Troubleshooting Source Problems with the Analog Bus e 7 34 Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools 1 7 34 Phase Lock Error Messages 2 ee ee 7 34 Phase Lock Diagnostic Routines o u e o 7 34 Index Contents 2
220. required Even at 3 GHz the comb should look as clean as Figure 7 24 For Option 006 instruments at 6 GHz the comb tooth level should be approximately 46 dBm 7 28 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Figure COMB7 here Figure 7 24 High Quality Comb Tooth at 3 GHz If the signal at the A7 output is good check the A7 to A4 cable If the signal is not as clean as Figure 7 24 observe the HI OUT input signal to the A7 assembly m On the network analyzer press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES PLL AUTO OFF Otherwise do not readjust the instrument Remove the A14 to A7 SMB cable W9 from the A7 pulse generator assembly CW 16 MHz m Set the spectrum analyzer to a center frequency of 45 MHz and a span of 30 MHz Connect it to the A14 to A7 cable still attached to the A14 assembly Narrow the span and bandwidth to observe the signal closely If the HI OUT signal is as clean as Figure 7 25 the A7 assembly is faulty Otherwise check the Al4 to A7 cable or recheck the A13 A14 fractional N as described ahead Rechecking the A13 A14 Fractional N Some phase lock problems may result from phase noise problems in the fractional N loop To troubleshoot this unusual failure mode do the following 1 Set the network analyzer at 60 MHz in the FRACN TUNE mode 2 Use a spectrum analyzer to examine the HI OUT signal from the A14 assembly The signal should appear as clean as Figure 7 25 The comb shape may vary from puls
221. revent electrical shock do not remove covers Warning These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Warning The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while itis being opened Warning Adjustments described in this document may be performed with power supplied to the product while protective covers are removed Energy available at many points may if contacted result in personal injury Warning The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply Warning For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating F 3 A 250 V The use of other fuses or material is prohibited 15 6 Safety and Licensing DRAFT 3 21 106 15 15
222. rified already Nevertheless you may elect to use the phase lock diagnostic routines or check the relevant signals at the assembly itself for confirmation Note If external source mode is the only operating mode with phase lock problems replace the All phase lock assembly DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 31 3 21 106 15 13 Phase Lock Check with PLL DIAG Refer to Phase Lock Diagnostic Tools in Source Group Troubleshooting Appendix at the end of this chapter for an explanation of the error messages and the diagnostic routines Follow the steps there to determine in which state the phase lock is lost m If NO IF FOUND is displayed confirm that the analog bus is functional and perform the Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 as outlined in Chapter 3 Adjustments and Correction Constants m If phase lock is lost in the ACQUIRE state the A11 assembly is faulty a If phase lock is lost in the TRACK state troubleshoot source phase lock loop components other than the All assembly Phase Lock Check by Signal Examination To confirm that the All assembly is receiving the signals required for its proper operation perform the following steps 1 Place the All assembly on the large extender board 2 Switch on the analyzer and press PRESET 3 Check for the signals listed in Table 7 8 Table 7 8 A11 Input Signals Mnemonic 1 O Access See Notes Figure FM COIL o A
223. rst calibration measurement trace for the selected error term into memory and then displays it Table 11 2 lists the test numbers Press SCALE REF and adjust the scale and reference to study the error term trace Press MARKER FCTN and use the marker functions to determine the error term magnitude Compare the displayed measurement trace to the trace shown in the following Error Term descriptions section and to previously measured data If data is not available from previous measurements refer to the typical uncorrected performance specifications listed in Table 11 2 Make a hardcopy of the measurement results a Connect a printing or plotting peripheral to the analyzer b Press LOCAL SYSTEM CONTROLLER SET ADDRESSES and select the appropriate peripheral to verify that the HP IB address is set correctly on the analyzer c Press SAVE RECALL and then choose either PRINT MONOCHROME or PLOT d Press DISPLAY MORE TITLE and title each data trace so that you can identify it later For detailed information on creating hardcopies refer to Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results in the HP 8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer User s Guide If Error Terms Seem Worse than Typical Values 1 2 Perform a system verification to verify that the system still conforms to specifications If system verification fails refer to Start Troubleshooting Here Uncorrected Performance The following table
224. run the ADC offset 2 Then when the analyzer finishes test 18 press 17 X1 EXECUTE TEST to run the ADC linearity test If either of these tests FAIL the A10 assembly is probably faulty This can be confirmed by checking the 4 MHz signal and substituting the A10 assembly or checking the signals listed in Table 8 1 Check 2nd LO Check the 2nd LO signal Refer to the A12 Reference Check section of Chapter 7 Source Troubleshooting for analog bus and oscilloscope checks of the 2nd LO and waveform illustrations m If the analyzer passes the checks continue to Check the 4 MHz REF Signal m If the analyzer fails the checks perform the high low band transition adjustment If the adjustment fails or brings no improvement replace Al2 8 4 Receiver Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Check the 4 MHz REF Signal 1 Connect a cable from the RF OUT to input R 2 Press PRESET 3 Use an oscilloscope to observe the 4 MHz reference signal at A10P2 6 m If the signal does not resemble Figure 8 3 troubleshoot the signal source A12P2 36 and path m If the signal is good the probability is greater than 90 that the A10 assembly is faulty For confirmation perform Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination Figure WAVES here Figure 8 3 4 MHz REF Waveform Check A10 by Substitution or Signal Examination If the 4 MHz REF signal is good at the A10 digital IF assembly check the A10 assembl
225. rx screwdriver T 15 Non conductive flat head screwdriver 2 inches eee eee HP P N 8830 0024 Antistatic wrist strap HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap cord cece cece ene e ene eas HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire sse HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes Use this procedure to adjust the vertical position and focus of the analyzer color display Caution These are the only display adjustments Any other adjustments to the color display will void the warranty Vertical Adjustment Procedure 1 Remove the left rear bumpers and left side panel Figure VERT here Figure 3 15 Vertical Position and Focus Adjustment Locations 2 Insert the flat head screw driver into the vertical position hole 3 Adjust the control until the softkey labels are aligned with the softkeys Focus Adjustment Procedure 4 Use the screw driver from step 3 to adjust the focus until the display has the most readability 3 40 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Display Degaussing Demagnetizing Required Equipment and Tools Any CRT demagnetizer or bulk tape eraser Antistatic wrist strap 6c cece cece nent e ne ee ara HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap cord 2 0 cece cece rr HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire 00 HP P N 9300 0797 As with all color monitors the display is very susceptible to external m
226. s 1 Figures 8 1 Equipment Setup cc 8 3 8 2 Typical Good Trace 2 ww a a a 8 4 8 3 4 MHz REF Waveform o 8 5 8 4 Digital Data Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as s Trigger o 8 7 8 5 Digital Control Lines Observed Using L INTCOP as Trigger L 8 7 8 6 2nd IF 4 kHz Waveform e 8 8 8 7 Typical Trace with Sampler Correction On and Of e 8 9 Tables 8 1 Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation a aoa a a a aa 8 6 8 2 2nd IF 4 kHz Signal Locations o uoo a a a 8 8 8 3 2nd LO Locations PPP 8 10 Contents 2 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 8 Receiver Troubleshooting Use this procedure only if you have read Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow the procedures in the order given unless instructed otherwise The receiver group assemblies consist of the following a A4 5 6 sampler mixer assemblies a A10 digital IF assembly DRAFT Receiver Troubleshooting 8 1 3 21 106 15 13 Assembly Replacement Sequence The following steps show the sequence to replace an assembly in an HP 8753D Network Analyzer 1 Identify the faulty group Refer to Chapter 4 Start Troubleshooting Here Follow up with the appropriate troubleshooting chapter that identifies the faulty assembly 2 Order a replacement assembly Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts 3 Replace the faulty assembly and determine what adjustments are necessary Refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Pr
227. s Required a a a a a 14 22 Removal 2 oa a a a a 14 22 Replacement 2 a a a a A 14 22 A3 Source Assembly a a a a 14 24 Tools Required 2 a a 14 24 Removal 2 oa a a a a 14 24 Replacement PA 14 24 A4 A5 A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator a 14 26 Tools Required a a a a a 14 26 Removal 2 oa a a a a 14 26 Replacement PA 14 26 A8 A10 All A12 A13 AIM Card Cage Boards So eee ee J4 28 Tools Required Loe ee L 14 28 DRAFT Contents 1 3 21 106 15 15 Removal Replacement A9 CPU Board Tools Required Removal Replacement A9BTI Battery Tools Required Removal Replacement A15 Preregulator Tools Required Removal Replacement A16 Rear Panel Interface Tools Required Removal Replacement A17 Motherboard Assembly Tools Required Removal Replacement A18 Display Tools Required Removal Replacement o A19 Graphics Processor Tools Required Removal Replacement A20 Disk Drive Tools Required Removal Replacement A26 High Stability Frequency Reference Option 1D5 Tools Required Removal Replacement B1 Fan Tools Required Removal Replacement Post Repair Procedures for HP 8753D Option oll Index Contents 2 3 21 106 14 28 14 28 14 30 14 30 14 30 14 30 14 32 14 32 14 32 14 32 14 34 14 34 14 34 14 34 14 36 14 36 14 36 14 36 14 38 14 38 14 38 14 40 14 42 14 42 14 42 14 42 14 44 14 44 14 44 14 44 14 46 14 46 14 46 14 46 14 48 1
228. s in Figure 7 5 b not solid as in Figure 7 5 a This is because in SRC TUNE mode the output is not phase locked Figure PLCOMP7 here Figure 7 5 Phase Locked Output Compared to Open Loop Output in SRC Tune Mode 7 Press MENU POWER to vary the power and check for corresponding level changes on the test instrument A power change of 20 dB will change the voltage observed on the oscilloscope by a factor of ten 8 Note the results of the frequency and power changes m If the frequency and power output changes are correct skip ahead to A12 Reference Check located in this chapter 7 8 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 m If the frequency changes are not correct continue with YO Coilk Drive Check with Analog Bus m If the power output changes are not correct check analog bus node 3 a Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input MORE REAL 3 xa b Press MARKER 2 G n The marker should read approximately 434 mU c Press MARKER 4 G n The marker should read approximately 646 mU DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 9 3 21 106 15 13 YO Coil Drive Check with Analog Bus Note If the analog bus is not functional perform the YO Drive Coil Check with Oscilloscope test 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON SERVICE MODES SOURCE PLL OFF MEAs 3 PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input COUNTER ANALOG BUS 2 Then press
229. s noted in Figure 7 9 and Figure 7 10 High Band REF Signal In high band the REF signal is a constant 1 MHz square wave as indicated by Figure 7 9 Figure HBSIG7 here Figure 7 9 High Band REF Signal gt 16 MHz CW DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 15 3 21 106 15 13 Low Band REF Signal In low band this signal follows the frequency of the RF output signal Figure 7 10 illustrates a 5 MHz CW signal Figure REFSIG7 here Figure 7 10 REF Signal at A11TP9 5 MHz CW a If REF looks good skip ahead to 4 MHz Reference Signal a If REF is bad in low band continue with FN LO at A12 Check 7 16 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 FN LO at A12 Check 1 Use an oscilloscope to observe the FN LO from A14 at the cable end of A14J2 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU SERVICE MODES FRACN TUNE ON to switch on the fractional N service mode 2 Use the front panel knob to vary the frequency from 30 to 60 MHz The signal should appear similar to Figure 7 11 The display will indicate 10 to 60 8 MHz a If the FN LO signal is good the A12 assembly is faulty b If the FN LO signal is not good skip ahead to A13 A14 Fractional N Check Figure LOWAVE 7 here Figure 7 11 Typical FN LO Waveform at A12J1 DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 17 3 21 106 15 13 4 MHz Reference Signal This reference signal is used to control the receiver If faulty this signal can cause apparent source problems because the CPU
230. s the counter display from the display The counter can be switched on with one of the next three keys Note Using the counter slows the sweep The counter bandwidth is 16 MHz unless otherwise noted for a specific node Note OUTPCNTR is the HP IB command to output the counter s frequency data ANALOG BUS switches the counter to monitor the analog bus FRAC N switches the counter to monitor the Al4 fractional N VCO frequency at the node shown on the Overall Block Diagram in the Start Troubleshooting chapter DIV FRAC N switches the counter to monitor the Al4 fractional N VCO frequency after it has been divided down to 100 kHz for phase locking the VCO 10 18 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Analog Bus Nodes The following paragraphs describe the 31 analog bus nodes The nodes are listed in numerical order and are grouped by assembly Refer to the Overall Block Diagram for node locations A3 Source To observe six of the eight A3 analog bus nodes not node 5 or 8 perform Step A3 to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then follow the node specific instructions Step A3 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON ANALOG IN FORMAT MORE REAL Ch FREQ 5 G n SWEEP TYPE MENU POWER SWEEP Eran 5 Ga ror 10 a DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 19 3 21 106 15 14 Node 1 Mn Pwr DAC main power DAC Perform step A3 above to set up a power
231. selector switch setting and actual line voltage to see that they are all correct Figure 5 4 shows how to remove the line fuse using a small flat bladed screwdriver to pry out the fuse holder Figure 5 2 shows the location of the line voltage selector switch Use a small flat bladed screwdriver to select the correct switch position If the A15 green LED is still not on steadily replace A15 Figure FUSES here Figure 5 4 Removing the Line Fuse 5 6 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 If the Red LED on A15 is ON If the red LED is on or flashing the power supply is shutting down Use the following procedures to determine which assembly is causing the problem Check the A8 Post Regulator 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Disconnect the cable A15W1 from the A8 post regulator See Figure 5 5 3 Switch on the analyzer and observe the red LED on A15 m If the red LED goes out the problem is probably the A8 post regulator Continue to Verify the A15 Preregulator to first verify that the inputs to A8 are correct a If the red LED is still on the problem is probably the A15 preregulator or one of the assemblies obtaining power from it Continue with Check for a Faulty Assembly Figure PWRCABL5 here Figure 5 5 Power Supply Cable Locations DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 7 3 21 106 15 12 Verify the A15 Preregulator Verify that the A15 preregulator is supplying the correct voltages to the A8 po
232. set has been POKEd Attenuation Control Voltages Voltage levels on the pins identified in Table 9 2 control test set attenuation Press MENU POWER ATTENUATOR PORT 1 and enter the attenuation values listed below After each entry check the pins see Figure 9 4 for the indicated voltages Table 9 2 Attenuation Voltage Matrix Attenuation HP 85046A B HP 85047A PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN PIN 11 22 23 8 11 22 23 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10 5 0 45 5 5 0 5 20 5 5 0 5 5 5 0 30 5 0 0 5 5 0 0 40 0 5 5 5 0 5 5 50 0 0 5 5 0 0 5 60 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 70 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 m Proper voltages refer to the test set manual to continue troubleshooting For HP 85047A systems first see HP 85047A Note above to reset the analyzer a Wrong voltages replace the A16 rear panel assembly of the analyzer 9 8 Accessories Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Measurement Control Signals Voltage levels on the pins identified in Table 9 3 control measurement direction forward or reverse and the doubler off function Press MEAS S PARAMETERS and enter the measurements listed below After each entry check the pins see Figure 9 4 for the indicated voltages In similar fashion change the frequency range to 6 GHz or 3 GHz by pressing SYSTEM FREQ RANGE 3GHz6GHz and check the pins for the indicated voltages Table 9 3 Measurement Voltage Matrix
233. signal RF OUT goes to the A4 R input sampler mixer assembly The source RF output must be connected externally to the R input connector in the Option 011 4 The signal from the source is fed back 1st IF to the phase comparator The source RF OUT signal passes directly through the sampler in the A4 assembly because the sampler is biased on The signal 1st IF is fed back unaltered to the phase comparator in the All phase lock assembly The other input to the phase comparator is the heterodyned reference signal from the A12 assembly Any frequency difference between these two signals produces a proportional error voltage 5 A tuning signal YO DRIVE tunes the source and phase lock is achieved The error voltage is used to drive the A3 source YIG oscillator to bring the YIG closer to the reference frequency The loop process continues until the source frequency and the reference frequency are the same and phase lock is achieved DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 11 3 21 106 15 14 6 A synthesized sub sweep is generated The source tracks the synthesizer When lock is achieved at the start frequency the synthesizer starts to sweep This changes the phase lock reference frequency and causes the source to track at a difference frequency 40 MHz below the synthesizer Figure LBBLK12 here Figure 12 4 Low Band Operation of the Source The full low band is produced in two sub sweeps to allow addition IF filtering below 3 MHz At the transit
234. splitter X X X X Analyzer sampler X X X A10 digital IF X External cables X X If you detect problems using error term analysis use the following approach to isolate the fault m Check the cable by examining the load match and transmission tracking terms If those terms are incorrect go to Cable Test m Verify the calibration kit devices Loads If the directivity error term looks good the load and the test port are good If directivity looks bad connect the same load on the other test port and measure its directivity If the second port looks bad as if the problem had shifted with the load replace the load If the second port looks good as if the load had not been the problem troubleshoot the first port Shorts and opens If the source match and reflection tracking terms look good the shorts and the opens are good If these terms look bad while the rest of the terms look good proceed to Verify Shorts and Opens Cable Test The load match error term is a good indicator of cable problems You can further verify a faulty cable by measuring the reflection of the cable Perform an 511 1 port calibration directly at port 1 no cables Then connect the suspect cable to port 1 and terminate the open end in 50 ohms Figure 9 1 shows the return loss trace of a good left side and faulty cable Note that the important characteristic of a cable trace is its level the good cable trace is much lower
235. ssembly Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure Note When reinstalling the keyboard assembly A1 place the eight screws in the holes plated with a circular pattern The other four holes secure the interface board A2 Initially you should install all eight screws loosely Then you can go back and tighten each one This will ensure that the board is correctly aligned 14 20 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A1 Keyboard Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 21 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A2 Front Panel Interface Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver m small slot screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap m 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in lb Removal 1 Remove the front panel refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter 2 Disconnect W18 W19 and RPGIWI from the interface board A2 3 Disconnect A1W1 from the interface board A2 inserting the blade of a small slot screwdriver into the slots on the sides of the ribbon cable connector Gently pry upward on either side of the connector until the ribbon cable is detached 4 Remove the four screws item 1 from the corners of the interface board A2 Remove the board Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 22 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 1
236. st Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 2 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Option Report Number 006 Serial Number Date bb 1 Source Frequency Range and Accuracy CW Frequency Lower Limit Measured Value Upper Limit Measurement MHz MHz MHz MHz Uncertainty MHz 0 3 0 299 997 0 300 003 0 000 000 520 5 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 000 008 610 16 0 15 999 840 16 000 160 0 000 028 220 31 0 30 999 690 31 000 310 0 000 053 730 60 999 999 60 999 390 61 000 610 0 000 104 800 121 0 120 998 790 121 001 210 0 000 206 800 180 0 179 998 200 180 001 800 0 000 307 200 310 0 309 995 900 310 003 100 0 000 528 300 700 0 699 930 000 700 007 000 0 001 191 700 1 300 0 1 299 987 1 300 013 0 002 212 300 2 000 0 1 999 980 2 000 020 0 003 403 000 3 000 0 2 999 970 3 000 030 0 005 104 000 4 000 0 3 999 960 4 000 040 0 006 805 000 5 000 0 4 999 950 5 000 050 0 008 506 000 6 000 0 5 999 940 6 000 060 0 010 207 000 DRAFT Performance Test Record 2b 3 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 3 of 18 For 30 kHz 6 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 and Report Number Option 006 Serial Number Date bb 2 Source Power Range Linearity and Accuracy Path Loss Calculations Worksheet
237. st regulator Use a voltmeter with a small probe to measure the output voltages of A15W1 s plug Refer to Table 5 2 and Figure 5 6 m If the voltages are not within tolerance replace A15 m If the voltages are within tolerance A15 is verified Continue to Check for a Faulty Assembly Table 5 2 Output Voltages Pin A15W1P1 Disconnected A8J2 Connected Voltages A15 Preregulator Mnemonic Voltages 1 2 125 to 100 68 to 72 70 V 3 4 22 4 to 33 6 17 0 to 18 4 18 V 5 6 22 4 to 33 6 17 0 to 18 4 18 V 7 N C N C N C 8 9 4 to 14 7 4 to 8 0 8 V 9 10 9 4 to 14 6 7 to 7 3 8 V 11 32 to 48 24 6 to 26 6 25 V 12 N C N C N C NOTE The 5VD supply must be loaded by one or more assemblies at all times or the other voltages will not be correct It connects to motherboard connector A17J3 Pin 4 Figure PLUGS here Figure 5 6 A15W1 Plug Detail 5 8 Power Supply Troubleshooting 3 21 106 DRAFT 15 12 Check for a Faulty Assembly This procedure checks for a faulty assembly that might be shutting down the A15 preregulator via one of the following lines also refer to Figure 5 1 m A15W1 connecting to the A8 post regulator m the 5VCPU line through the motherboard m the 5VDIG line through the motherboard Do the following 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Ensure that A15W1 is reconnected to A8 Refer to Figure 5 5 3 Remove or disconnect the assemblies
238. sweep on the analog bus Then press MEAS ANALOG IN 1 x1 SCALE REF AUTO SCALE Node 1 detects the RF power from the cavity oscillator into the level modulator Flat line segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between 15 dBm and 10 dBm A flat line at about 0 V indicates the cavity oscillator is not outputting any power Figure NODE1 here Figure 10 4 Analog Bus Node 1 10 20 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 Node 2 Sre 1V GHz source 1 volt per GHz Perform step A3 above to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press MEAS ANALOG IN 2 1 SCALE REF AUTO SCALE Node 2 detects the RF power out of the level modulator Flat line segments indicate ALC saturation and should not occur between 15 dBm and 10 dBm In Figure 10 5 the flat part is in the last right side division A flat line at about 0 V indicates the cavity oscillator is not outputting any power Figure NODE2 here Figure 10 5 Analog Bus Node 2 DRAFT Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 21 3 21 106 15 14 Node 3 Amp Id amplifier input detector Perform step A3 above to set up a power sweep on the analog bus Then press MEAS ANALOG IN G 1 SCALE REF AUTO SCALE Node 3 detects the power out of the mixer and into the amplifier Typically the trace is flat at 0 V up to about 10 dBm the response limit of the analog bus detector Figure NODES here Figure 10 6 Analog Bus Node 3 10
239. t 2 2 1 ee 3 42 Frequency Accuracy Adjustment Ca 3 45 HP 8753D Option 011 with Option 1D5 Only Ca 3 47 High Low Band Transition Adjustment PP 3 48 Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment a 3 50 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment a 3 54 Unprotected Hardware Option Numbers Correction Constants a 3 56 Sequences for Mechanical Adjustments 2 2 a a eee 3 58 How to Load Sequences from Disk L 3 58 How to Set Up the Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment L 3 58 DRAFT Contents 1 3 21 106 15 11 How to Set Up the High Low Band Transition Adjustments 3 59 How to Set Up the Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment 3 59 Sequence Contents Loe ee 3 59 Sequence for the High Low Band Transition Adjustment a 3 59 Sequences for the Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment 3 60 Sequences for the Fractional N Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment 3 61 Index Contents 2 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Figures 3 1 Partial Component Location Diagram 3 5 3 2 Setup A for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants 3 11 3 3 Setup B for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants 3 12 3 4 Setup C for the HP 8753D Option 011 RF Output Correction Constants 3 13 3 5 Maximum Intensity Adjustment Setup 3 17 3 6 Setup for IF Amplifier Correction Constants 3 19 3 7 Input R Sampler Correction Setup 3 24 3 8 Input A Sampler Correction Setup 3
240. t regulator not supplying enough current To check this reinstall the assemblies in a different order to change the loading If the same assembly appears to be faulty replace that assembly If a different assembly appears faulty A8 is most likely faulty unless both of the other assemblies are faulty Briefly Disable the Shutdown Circuitry In this step you shutdown the protective circuitry is disabled for a short time and the supplies are forced on including shorted supplies with a 100 duty cycle Caution Damage to components or to circuit traces may occur if ASTP4 SDIS is shorted to chassis ground for more than a few seconds while supplies are shorted 1 Connect ASTP4 SDIS to chassis ground with a jumper wire 2 Switch on the analyzer and note the signal mnemonics and test points of any LEDs that are off Immediately remove the jumper wire 3 Refer to the block diagram Figure 5 8 at the end of this chapter and do the following m Note the mnemonics of any additional signals that may connect to any A8 test point that showed a fault in the previous step 5 12 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 m Cross reference all assemblies that use the power supplies whose A8 LEDs went out when A8TP4 SDIS was connected to chassis ground DRAFT Power Supply Troubleshooting 5 13 3 21 106 15 12 m Make a list of these assemblies m Delete the following assemblies from your list as they have already been
241. the hex nuts and washers from the BNC connectors item 5 as shown 4 Remove the two hex screws and washers that attach the test set I O interconnect item 6 Remove the rear panel board A16 Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 36 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A16 Rear Panel Interface Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 37 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A17 Motherboard Assembly Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver a T 15 TORX screwdriver a T 20 TORX screwdriver m small slot screwdriver m 2 5 mm hex key driver m 5 16 inch open end torque wrench set to 10 in 1b a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top bottom and side covers refer to Covers in this chapter Remove the front panel assembly refer to Front Panel Assembly in this chapter Remove the rear panel assembly refer to Rear Panel Assembly in this chapter Remove the preregulator refer to A15 Preregulator in this chapter Remove the fan refer to Bl Fan in this chapter Remove the graphics processor refer to A19 Graphics Processor in this chapter NaI Dm oO F amp F W Ww Remove the Type N connector assembly refer to Type N Connector Assembly in this chapter 8 Remove the disk drive deck refer to A20 Disk Drive in
242. their calibration factors To enter each point follow these steps a Press ADD FREQUENCY b Input a frequency value and then press the appropriate key G n M74 or k m C Press CAL FACTOR and enter the calibration factor percentage that corresponds to the frequency you entered The calibration factor and frequency values are found on the back of the sensor If you make a mistake press and re enter the correct value d Press DONE to complete the data entry for each point Note The following terms are part of the sensor calibration menu SEGMENT Allows you to select a frequency point EDIT Allows you to edit or change a previously entered value DELETE Allows you to delete a point from the sensor cal factor table ADD Allows you to add a point into the sensor cal factor table CLEAR LIST Allows you to erase the entire sensor cal factor table DONE Allows you to complete the points entry of the sensor cal factor table 7 For Option 006 Instruments Only Press CAL FACTOR SENSOR B to create a power sensor calibration table for power sensor B HP 8481A using the softkeys mentioned above Since sensor B is only used for 3 GHz to 6 GHz measurements you only need to input calibration factors for this frequency range 8 Zero and calibrate the power meter and power sensor Update Sampler Correction Constants 9 Preset zero and calibrate the power meter and HP 8482A sensor A 10 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TE
243. this chapter 9 Remove the CPU board refer to A9 CPU Board in this chapter 10 Remove the memory deck item 1 by removing three screws item 2 from the bottom corner struts of the motherboard card cage assembly There are two screws on the right side and one on the left side 14 38 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A17 Motherboard Assembly Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 39 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A17 Motherboard Assembly 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Remove the display refer to A18 Display in this chapter Remove the source assembly refer to A3 Source Assembly in this chapter Remove the samplers and pulse generator refer to A4 A5 A6 Samplers and A7 Pulse Generator in this chapter Remove the card cage boards refer to A8 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 Card Cage Boards in this chapter Remove the bezel support item 3 by removing the three screws item 4 from the left side of the front frame Remove the actuator assembly item 5 and insulator strip item 6 by unhooking the spring item 7 and removing the screw item 8 that secures them to the display housing Remove the front frame item 9 and rear frame item 10 by removing the attaching screws item 11 At this point only the motherboard card cage assembly should remain This whole assembly is replaceable Replacement m Reverse the ord
244. thod unless the analog bus is non functional or any of the signals fail the specifications listed in Table 7 2 If the analog bus is non functional or the previous check has revealed questionable signals observe the signal s with an oscilloscope Table 7 3 identifies a convenient test point and a plot for the five signals listed Table 7 3 A12 Reference Frequencies Mnemonic Signal Location See Analyzer Description Figure Setting FN100kHzREF 100 kHz Reference A13TP5 Figure 7 8 any REF Phase Lock Reference A11TP1 Pin 9 Figure 7 9 gt 16 MHz CW REF Phase Lock Reference A11TP1 Pin 9 Figure 7 10 5 MHz CW FN LO Fractional N LO A14J2 Figure 7 11 10 MHz CW 4 MHz REF 4 MHz Reference A12TP9 Figure 7 12 any 2ND LO Second LO A12P1 2 4 Figure 7 13 gt 16 MHz CW 2ND LO Second LO A12P1 2 4 Figure 7 14 14 MHz CW Not an A12 signal but required for A12 lowband operation DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 13 3 21 106 15 13 100 kHz Pulses The 100 kHz pulses are very narrow and typically 1 5 V in amplitude You may have to increase the oscilloscope intensity to see these pulses See Figure 7 8 Figure SHARP7 here Figure 7 8 Sharp 100 kHz Pulses at A13TP5 any frequency 7 14 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 PLREF Waveforms REF Signal At A11TP1 Pin 9 REF is the buffered PLREF signal The 1st IF is phase locked to this signal Use an oscilloscope to observe the signal at the frequencie
245. tible Peripherals chapter in the User s Guide HP IB programming information is also provided in the Programming Guide Invoking Tests Remotely Many tests require a response to the displayed prompts Since bit 1 of the Event Status Register B is set bit 1 service routine waiting any time a service routine prompts the user for an expected response you can send an appropriate response using one of the following techniques m Read event status register B to reset the bit a Enable bit 1 to interrupt ESNB D See Status Reporting in the Programming Guide m Respond to the prompt with a TESRn command see Tests Menu at the beginning of this chapter Symbol Conventions An optional operand numerical operand lt gt A necessary appendage An either or choice in appendages Analog Bus Codes 10 40 Service Key Menus and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 ANAI D Measures and displays the analog input The preset state input to the analog bus is the rear panel AUX IN The other 30 nodes may be selected with D only if the ABUS is enabled ANABon OUTPCNTR Outputs the counter s frequency data OUTPERRO Reads any prompt message sent to the error queue by a service routine OUTPTESS Outputs the integer status of the test most recently executed Status codes are those listed under TST TST Executes the power on self test internal test 1 and outputs an integer test status Status codes are as fol
246. ting Temperature The temperature sensing circuitry inside the A15 preregulator may be shutting down the supply Make sure the temperature of the open air operating environment does not exceed 55 C 131 F and that the analyzer fan is operating m If the fan does not seem to be operating correctly refer to Fan Troubleshooting at the end of this procedure m If there does not appear to be a temperature problem it is likely that A15 is faulty Inspect the Motherboard If the red LED is still on after replacement or repair of A15 switch off the analyzer and inspect the motherboard for solder bridges and other noticeable defects Use an ohmmeter to check for shorts The 5VD 5VCPU or 5VDSENSE lines may be bad Refer to the block diagram Figure 5 8 at the end of this chapter and troubleshoot these suspected power supply lines on the A17 motherboard 5 10 Power Supply Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 12 If the Green LEDs on A8 are not All ON The green LEDs along the top edge of the A8 post regulator are normally on Flashing LEDs on A8 indicate that the shutdown circuitry on the A8 post regulator is protecting power supplies from overcurrent conditions by repeatedly shutting them down This may be caused by supply loading on A8 or on any other assembly in the analyzer Remove A8 Maintain A15W1 Cable Connection 1 Switch off the analyzer 2 Remove A8 from its motherboard connector but keep the A15W1 cable connecte
247. tion constants m Move the A9 CC jumper to the NRM position after you have run correction constant adjustment routines This is the position for normal operating conditions 7 Reconnect the power line cord and switch on the instrument Figure JUMP3 here Figure 3 1 Partial Component Location Diagram DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 5 3 21 106 15 11 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This internal adjustment routine writes default correction constants for the source power accuracy 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 44 EXECUTE TEST YES 2 Observe the analyzer for the results of the adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays Source Def DONE you have completed this procedure m If the analyzer displays Source Def FAIL refer to Source Troubleshooting 3 6 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 Source Pretune Default Correction Constants Test 45 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment writes default correction constants for rudimentary phase lock pretuning accuracy 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS EXECUTE TEST YES 2 Observe the analyzer for the results of this adjustment routine m If the analyzer displays Pretune Def DONE you have completed this procedure m If the analyzer displays FAIL refer to the Source Troubleshooting chapter DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Co
248. to the A10 digital IF assembly These signals are sampled at a 16 kHz rate A fourth input is the analog bus which can monitor either an external input at the rear panel AUX IN connector or one of 31 internal nodes A multiplexer sequentially directs each of the signals to the ADC analog to digital converter Here they are converted to digital form and sent to the A9 CPU assembly for processing Refer to Digital Control Theory for more information on signal processing DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 21 3 21 106 15 14 Contents 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures Replacing an assembly Co 14 2 Procedures described in this chapter Co 14 3 Line Fuse e 14 4 Tools Required a 14 4 Removal 2 2 6 ee 14 4 Replacement 2 2 ee 14 4 Covers a 14 6 Tools Required AN 14 6 Removing the top Cover 14 6 Removing the side covers 1 ee o 14 6 Removing the bottom cover lc 14 6 Front Panel Assembly 2 2 e 14 8 Tools Required 14 8 Removal 2 2 6 6 a 14 8 Replacement A 14 10 Rear Panel Assembly 14 12 Tools Required a a a a a 14 12 Removal 2 oa a a a a 14 12 Replacement PPP 14 14 Type N Connector Assembly PPP 14 16 Tools Required a a a a a 14 16 Removal 2 oa a a a a 14 16 Replacement 2 a a a a A 14 18 Al Keyboard 2 2 ee a 14 20 Tools Required 14 20 Removal 2 2 6 6 a 14 20 Replacement PPP 14 20 A2 Front Panel Interface PPP 14 22 Tool
249. ts and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 In Case of Difficulty m If this adjustment can not be performed satisfactorily repeat the entire procedure Or else replace the A13 board assembly DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 53 3 21 106 15 11 Source Spur Avoidance Tracking Adjustment Required Equipment and Tools TORX screwdriver T 15 BNC alligator clip adapter ccc cece cece cece nee een eens HP P N 8120 1292 BNC to BNC cable 2 2 ec e cee e nen e teen nen rne HP P N 8120 1840 Antistatic wrist Strap e HP P N 9300 1367 Antistatic wrist strap Cord HP P N 9300 0980 Static control table mat and earth ground wire sse HP P N 9300 0797 Analyzer warm up time 30 minutes This adjustment optimizes tracking between the YO YIG oscillator and the cavity oscillator when they are frequency offset to avoid spurs Optimizing YO cavity oscillator tracking reduces potential phase locked loop problems 1 Remove the upper rear corner bumpers and top cover using a torx screwdriver 2 Mate the adapter to the BNC cable and connect the BNC connector end to AUX INPUT on the analyzer rear panel Connect the BNC center conductor alligator clip to A11 TP10 labeled ERR the shield clip to A11 TP1 GND as shown in Figure 3 25 Figure A11CAV here Figure 3 25 Location of A11 Test Points and A3 CAV ADJ Adjustments 3 54 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 3 Press PRESET CENTER
250. ts are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology to the extent allowed by the Institute s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett Packard and Hewlett Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duties and taxes for products returned to Hewlett Packard from another country Hewlett Packard warrants that its software and firmware designated by Hewlett Packard for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Hewlett Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outsid
251. u want to load the file for the Fractional N Spur Avoidance and FM Sideband Adjustment m Select LOAD SEQ HBLBADJ if you want to load the file for the High Low Band Transition Adjustment m Select LOAD SEQ FNADJ and LOAD SEQ FNCHK if you want to load the files for the Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment How to Set Up the Fractional N Frequency Range Adjustment 1 Remove the right rear bumpers and right side cover This exposes the adjustment location in the sheet metal 2 Press PRESET SEQUENCE X FNADJ where X is the sequence number 3 Adjust the FN VCO TUNE with a non metallic tool so that the channel 1 marker is as many divisions above the reference line as the channel 2 marker is below it 4 Press PRESET SEQUENCE X FNCHK where X is the sequence number m If the marker value is lt 7 you have completed this procedure m If the marker value is gt 7 readjust FN VCO TUNE to 7 Then repeat steps 2 3 and 4 to confirm that the channel 1 and channel 2 markers are still above and below the reference line respectively 3 58 Adjustments and Correction Constants DRAFT 3 21 106 15 11 How to Set Up the High Low Band Transition Adjustments l Press PRESET SEQ X HBLBADJ where X is the sequence number 2 Observe the VCO tuning trace m If the left half of trace 0 1000 mV and right half of the trace 100 to 200 mV higher one to two divisions no adjustment is necessary
252. unctional groups Each group consists of several major assemblies and performs a distinct function in the instrument Some assemblies are related to more than one group and in fact all the groups are to some extent interrelated and affect each other s performance Power Supply The power supply functional group consists of the A8 post regulator and the A15 preregulator It supplies power to the other assemblies in the instrument Digital Control The digital control group consists of the Al front panel and A2 front panel processor the A9 CPU the A16 rear panel the A18 display and the A19 graphics system processor GSP The A10 digital IF assembly is also related to this group These assemblies combine to provide digital control for the analyzer and an HP 85047A or 85046A B S parameter test set if used Source The source group consists of the A3 source A7 pulse generator All phase lock A12 reference A13 fractional N analog and A14 fractional N digital assemblies The A4 DRAFT Theory of Operation 12 3 3 21 106 15 14 sampler is also related since it is part of the source phase lock loop The source supplies a phase locked RF signal to the device under test Signal Separation The signal separation group divides the source signal into a reference path and a test path and provides connections to the device under test To accomplish this one of several external test sets must be connected to the analyzer Receiver The receiver
253. us and Error Messages DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 System Verification Tests These tests apply mainly to system level error corrected verification and troubleshooting Tests 27 to 31 are associated with the system verification procedure documented in the System Verification and Performance Tests chapter Tests 32 to 43 facilitate examining the calibration coefficient arrays error terms resulting from a measurement calibration refer to the Error Terms chapter for details 27 Sys Ver Init Recalls the initialization state for system verification from disk in preparation for a measurement calibration It must be done before 28 29 30 or 31 are performed 28 Ver Dev 1 Recalls verification limits from disk for verification device 1 in all applicable S parameter measurements It performs pass fail limit testing of the current measurement 29 Ver Dev 2 Same as 27 above for device 2 30 Ver Dev 3 Same as 27 above for device 3 31 Ver Dev 4 Same as 27 above for device 4 32 43 Cal Coet 1 12 Copies error term data from a measurement calibration array to display memory A measurement calibration must be complete and active The definition of calibration arrays depends on the current calibration type After execution the memory is automatically displayed Refer to the Error Term chapter for details Adjustment Tests The tests without asterisks are used in the procedures located in the Adjustments chapter of this m
254. uses receiver data to control the source At A12TP9 it should appear similar to Figure 7 12 Figure REFS7 here Figure 7 12 4 MHz Reference Signal at A12TP9 Preset 7 18 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 2ND LO Waveforms The 2nd LO signals appear different in phase and shape at different frequencies Refer to Table 7 3 for convenient test points 90 Degree Phase Offset of 2nd LO Signals in High Band In high band the 2nd LO is 996 kHz As indicated by Figure 7 13 the 2nd LO actually consists of two signals 90 degrees out of phase Figure PHASEO7 here Figure 7 13 90 Degree Phase Offset of High Band 2nd LO Signals gt 16 MHz CW DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 19 3 21 106 15 13 In Phase 2nd LO Signals in Low Band The 2nd LO signals in low band as shown in Figure 7 14 are not phase shifted In low band these signals track the RF output with a 4 kHz offset Figure INPHAS7 here Figure 7 14 In Phase Low Band 2nd LO Signals 14 MHz CW If any of the signals of Table 7 2 are incorrect the probability is 90 that the A12 assembly is faulty Either consider the A12 assembly faulty or perform the A12 Digital Control Signals Check described below 7 20 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 A12 Digital Control Signals Check Several digital control signals must be functional for the A12 assembly to operate properly Check the control lines listed in Table 7 4 with the oscilloscope in the high inp
255. ut impedance setting Table 7 4 A12 Related Digital Control Signals Mnemonic Signal Location See Analyzer Description Figure Setting L ENREF L Reference Enable A12P2 16 Figure 7 15 Preset L HB L High Band A12P2 32 Figure 7 16 Preset L LB L Low Band A12P1 23 Figure 7 16 Preset L ENREF Line This is a TTL signal To observe it trigger on the negative edge In preset state the signal should show activity similar to Figure 7 15 Figure ENREF7 here DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 Figure 7 15 L ENREF Line at A12P2 16 Preset Source Troubleshooting 7 21 L HB and LLB Lines These complementary signals toggle when the instrument switches from low band to high band as illustrated by Figure 7 16 Figure COMPSIG7 here Figure 7 16 Complementary L HB and L LB Signals Preset If all of the digital signals appeared good the A12 assembly is faulty A13 A14 Fractional N Check Use the analog bus or an oscilloscope to check the A14 VCO s ability to sweep from 30 MHz to 60 MHz The faster analog bus method should suffice unless problems are detected Fractional N Check with Analog Bus 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input FRAC N to switch on the analog bus and the fractional N counter 2 Then press MENU CW FREQ to set the analyzer to CW mode 3 Set the instrument as indicated in Table 7 5 and see whether the VCO generates the frequencies listed
256. verified earlier in this section A10 digital IF All phase lock A12 reference A13 fractional N analog A14 fractional N digital A18 display A19 graphics processor 4 Switch off the analyzer 5 Of those assemblies that are left on the list remove or disconnect them from the analyzer one at a time Table 5 4 shows the best order in which to remove them sorting them from most to least accessible Table 5 4 also lists any associated assemblies that are supplied by the assembly that is being removed After each assembly is removed or disconnected switch on the analyzer and observe the LEDs Note m Always switch off the analyzer before removing or disconnecting assemblies m When extensive disassembly is required refer to Chapter 14 Assembly Replacement and Post Repair Procedures m Refer to Chapter 13 Replaceable Parts to identify specific cables and assemblies that are not shown in this chapter s If all the LEDs light the assembly or one receiving power from it that allows them to light is faulty a If the LEDs are still not on steadily continue to Inspect the Motherboard Table 5 4 Recommended Order for Removal Disconnection Assembly Removal or Other Assemblies that Receive To Remove Disconnection Method Power from the Removed Assembly 1 A3 Source Remove from Card Cage None 2 A7 Pulse Generator Remove from Card Cage None 3 A4 R Sampler Re
257. vice Key Menus and Error Messages Service Key Menus Error Messages Service Key Menus Internal Diagnostics Tests Menu Test Options Menu Edit List Menu Self Diagnose Softkey Test Descriptions Internal Tests External Tests System Verification Tests Adjustment Tests Display Tests Test Patterns Service Key Menus Service Features Service Modes Menu Service Modes More Menu Analog Bus Description of the Analog Bus The Main ADC The Frequency Counter Analog In Menu Analog Bus Nodes A3 Source A10 Digital IF All Phase Lock A12 Reference o Al4 Fractional N Digital PEEK POKE Menu Firmware Revision Softkey HP IB Service Mnemonic Definitions Invoking Tests Remotely Analog Bus Codes Error Messages Index DRAFT 3 21 106 15 14 10 1 10 1 10 2 10 2 10 4 10 5 10 5 10 6 10 6 10 8 10 9 10 9 10 10 10 11 10 13 10 13 10 15 10 16 10 16 10 16 10 17 10 17 10 19 10 19 10 26 10 27 10 31 10 35 10 37 10 39 10 40 10 40 10 40 10 42 Contents 1 Figures 10 1 Internal Diagnostics Menus 2 o 10 2 10 2 Jumper Positions on the A9 CPU aaaea aaa 10 7 10 3 Service Feature Menus a aoa a a a a a 10 13 10 4 Analog Bus Node l 10 20 10 5 Analog Bus Node 2 aoa a aa a a ee 10 21 10 6 Analog Bus Node 3 ooa a aa 10 27 10 7 Analog Bus Node l 10 23 10 8 Analog Bus Node 6 oaoa aa aaa 10 24 10 9 Analog Bus Node oaoa aa 10 25 10 10 Analog Bus Node lB 2 a
258. vice internal test performs the following functions a destroys all correction constants and all un protected options E initializes certain EEPROM address locations to zeroes m replaces the display intensity correction constants with default values Note This routine WILL NOT alter the serial number or Options 002 006 and 010 correction constants 1 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TESTS 68 x1 EXECUTE TEST YES 2 Restore the analyzer options in the EEPROMs a If you have the correction constants backed up on a disk perform these steps a Place the disk in the analyzer disk drive and press SAVE RECALL SELECT DISK INTERNAL DISK b Use the front panel knob to highlight the filename that represents your serial number c Press RETURN RECALL STATE PRESET a If you don t have the correction constants backed up on a disk run all the internal service routines in the following order E Display Intensity Correction Constants Test 49 Source Default Correction Constants Test 44 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 45 Analog Bus Correction Constants Test 46 Source Pretune Correction Constants Test 48 Calibration Kit Default Correction Constants Test 57 ADC Offset Correction Constants Test 52 RF Output Power Correction Constants Test 47 Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 IF Amplifier Correction Constants Test 51 Cavity Oscillator Frequency Correction
259. wer level power slope power slope offset and the ALC roll off factors among others 1 If you just completed Sampler Magnitude and Phase Correction Constants Test 53 continue this procedure with step 8 2 Press PRESET LOCAL SYSTEM CONTROLLER 3 Press LOCAL SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS P MTR HPIB The default power meter address is 13 Refer to the power meter manual as required to observe or change its HP IB address 4 Press POWER MTR 438A 437 to toggle between the 438A 437 and 436A power meters Choose the appropriate model number Note If you are using the HP 438A power meter connect the HP 8482A power sensor to channel A and the HP 8481A power sensor to channel B DRAFT Adjustments and Correction Constants 3 9 3 21 106 15 11 Power Sensor Calibration Factor Entry 5 Zero and calibrate the power meter and sensor 6 Press SYSTEM SERVICE MENU TEST OPTIONS LOSS SENSR LISTS CAL FACTOR SENSOR A to access the calibration factor menu for power sensor A HP 84824 7 Build a table of up to 12 points 12 frequencies with their calibration factors To enter each point follow these steps a Press ADD FREQUENCY b Input a frequency value and then press the appropriate key G n m z or k m C Press CAL FACTOR and enter the calibration factor percentage that corresponds to the frequency you entered The cal factor and frequency values are found on the back of the sensor If you make a mistake
260. when selected ABUS Test Tests analog bus accuracy by measuring several analog bus reference voltages all nodes from the A10 digital IF This runs only when selected FN Count Uses the internal counter to count the Al4 fractional N VCO frequency 120 to 240 MHz and the divided fractional N frequency 100 kHz It requires the 100 kHz signal from A12 and the counter gate signal from A10 to pass External Tests These tests require either external equipment and connections or operator interaction of some kind to run Tests 30 and 60 are comprehensive front panel checks more complete than test 12 that checks the front panel keys and knob entry 21 Port 1 Op Chk Part of the Operator s Check procedure located in the Start Troubleshooting chapter The procedure requires the external connection of a short to PORT 1 22 Port 2 Op Chk Same as 21 but tests PORT 2 23 Fr Pan Seq Tests the front panel knob entry and all Al front panel keys as well as the front panel microprocessor on the A2 assembly It prompts the user to rotate the front panel knob then press each key in an ordered sequence It continues to the next prompt only if the current prompt is correctly satisfied 24 Fr Pan Diag Similar to 23 above but the user rotates the front panel knob or presses the keys in any order This test displays the command the instrument received 25 ADC Hist Factory use only 26 Source Ex Factory use only 10 8 Service Key Men
261. with SOURCE PLL OFF A12 Reference Check The signals are evaluated with pass fail checks The most efficient way to check the A12 frequency reference signals is to use the analog bus while referring to Table 7 2 Alternatively you can use an oscilloscope while referring to Table 7 3 and Figure 7 8 through Figure 7 14 If any of the observed signals differ from the figures there is a 90 probability that the A12 assembly is faulty Either consider the A12 assembly defective or perform the A12 Digital Control Signals Check Both of these procedures are described below DRAFT Source Troubleshooting 7 11 3 21 106 15 13 Analog Bus Method 1 2 3 Press PRESET SYSTEM SERVICE MENU ANALOG BUS ON MEAS S PARAMETERS ANALOG IN Aux Input ANALOG BUS to switch on the analog bus and its counter Press 21 to count the frequency of the 100 kHz signal Press CW FREQ k m Verify that the counter reading displayed on the analyzer next to cnt matches the corresponding 100 kHz value for the CW frequency Refer to Table 7 2 Verify the remaining CW frequencies comparing the counter reading with the value in Table 7 2 m Press 2 M m Press 50 M Table 7 2 Analog Bus Check of Reference Frequencies CW Frequency Analog Bus Node 21 Analog Bus Node 24 Analog Bus Node 25 100 kHz 2nd LO PLREF 500 kHz 0 100 MHz 0 504 MHz 0 500 MHz 2 MHz 0 100 MHz 2 007 MHz 2 000 MHz 50 MHz 0 100 MHz 0 996 MH
262. y by one of the following methods m Substitute another A10 assembly or m Check the signal control lines required for its operation The pins and signal sources of those lines are identified in Table 8 1 It is possible that the A9 assembly may not be providing the necessary signals These signal checks allow you to determine which assembly is faulty Some of the waveforms are illustrated by Figure 8 4 and Figure 8 5 If the substitute assembly shows no improvement or if all of the input signals are valid continue with Check the 4 kHz Signal Otherwise troubleshoot the suspect signal s or consider the A10 assembly faulty DRAFT Receiver Troubleshooting 8 5 3 21 106 15 13 Table 8 1 Signals Required for A10 Assembly Operation Mnemonic Description A10 Signal See Location Source Figure DIFDO Digital IF data 0 LSB P2 27 A9P2 27 DIFD1 Digital IF data 1 P2 57 A9P2 57 DIFD2 Digital IF data 2 P2 28 A9P2 28 DIFD3 Digital IF data 3 P2 58 A9P2 58 DIFD4 Digital IF data 4 P2 29 A9P2 29 DIFD5 Digital IF data 5 P2 59 A9P2 59 DIFD6 Digital IF data 6 P2 30 A9P2 30 DIFD7 Digital IF data 7 MSB P2 60 A9P2 60 L DIFENO Digital IF enable O P2 34 A9P2 34 L DIFEN1 Digital IF enable 1 P2 5 A9P2 5 L DIFEN2 Digital IF enable 2 P2 35 A9P2 35 DIFCC Digital IF conversion comp P2 33 A10P2 33 Figure 8 4 DIFCLK Digital IF serial clock P2 4 A10P2 4 Figure 8 4 DIF DATA Digital IF serial data out P2 3 A10P2
263. y for use by the factory since convergence cannot be adjusted in the field Test Pat 8 9 Displays crosshatch and inverse crosshatch patterns for testing color convergence linearity alignment and high voltage regulation in the factory only No field adjustments are possible Test Pat 10 Displays an H pattern for checking the focus of the display Under normal conditions this should never need to be adjusted However it is possible to adjust it by accessing the focus control adjustment at the left rear of the display See the Adjustments chapter Test Pat 11 Verifies the functionality of the pixel stretching circuit of the A19 GSP board Under normal conditions this pattern should appear all white If a failure occurs in the pixel stretching circuit the pattern will consist of 16 alternating white and gray vertical stripes Suspect problems with the STRETCH line and LFIRSTPIX Test Pat 12 Displays a repeating gray scale for troubleshooting using an oscilloscope It is similar to the 16 step gray scale but is repeated 32 times across the screen Each of the 3 outputs of the video palette will then show 32 ramps instead of one staircase between each horizontal sync pulse This pattern is used to troubleshoot the pixel processing circuit of the A19 GSP board Service Key Menus and Error Messages 10 11 15 14 78 79 80 Test Pat 13 Displays a color rainbow pattern for showing the ability of the A19 GSP board to displ
264. you can retrieve it through the opening in the rear of the display housing when you reinstall the display 3 Reverse the order of the removal procedure with the exception that the four screws item 4 should not be tightened until after you have reinstalled the bezel assembly and pushed the display forward in the display housing so that it is firmly pressing against the bezel assembly 14 42 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A18 Display Insert artwork here DRAFT Assembly Replacement and 14 43 3 21 106 15 15 Post Repair Procedures A19 Graphics Processor Tools Required a T 10 TORX screwdriver m T 15 TORX screwdriver a ESD electrostatic discharge grounding wrist strap Removal 1 Disconnect the power cord and remove the top cover refer to Covers in this chapter 2 Remove the clip item 1 that secures the graphics processor board A19 removing the two screws that attach it to the rear frame Gently press the top of the graphics processor board A19 towards the display A18 then lift up 3 Disconnect the two ribbon cables A18W1 and W20 and the wire bundle W14 from the graphics processor board A19 4 Disconnect the three flexible cables W21 W22 and W23 from the graphics processor board A19 Remove the board Replacement m Reverse the order of the removal procedure 14 44 Assembly Replacement and DRAFT Post Repair Procedures 3 21 106 15 15 A19 Graphics
265. z 3 0 GHz 3 kHz 90 N A DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 Performance Test Record 2a 9 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 9 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Report Number Serial Number Date bb 7 Receiver Magnitude Frequency Response CW Frequency Power R Input A Input B Input Greatest Spec Meas Meter Power Power Power Difference dB Uncer Reading dB Example 10 0 10 14 10 09 10 10 0 14 1 0 05 300 kHz 1 0 14 5 MHz 1 0 10 16 MHz 1 0 10 31 MHz 1 0 10 61 MHz 1 0 10 121 MHz 1 0 10 180 MHz 1 0 10 310 MHz 1 0 10 700 MHz 1 0 10 1 5 GHz 1 0 10 2 0 GHz 1 0 10 2 5 GHz 1 0 11 3 0 GHz 1 0 11 2a 10 Performance Test Record DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 10 of 18 For 300 kHz 3 GHz Analyzers Hewlett Packard Company Model HP 8753D Option 011 Serial Number Report Number Date bb 8 Phase Frequency Response Frequency Range Ratio Specification Measured Value Measurement Uncertainty 300 kHz 3 GHz A R 3 0 67 300 kHz 3 GHz B R 3 0 67 300 kHz 3 GHz A B 3 0 67 DRAFT 3 21 106 15 21 Performance Test Record 2a 11 HP 8753D Performance Test Record 11 of 18 For 300
266. z 1 000 MHz NOTE The counter should indicate the frequencies listed in this table to within 0 1 Accuracy may vary with gate time and signal strength 5 Press 24 to count the frequency of the 2nd LO signal 6 Press MENU CW FREQ k m Verify that the counter reading matches the corresponding 2nd LO value for the CW frequency Refer to Table 7 2 7 Verify the remaining CW frequencies comparing the counter reading with the value in Table 7 2 m Press 2 m m Press m 8 Press 25 x1 to count the frequency of the PLREF signal 9 Press MENU CW FREQ k m Verify that the counter reading matches the corresponding PLREF value for the CW frequency Refer to Table 7 2 10 Verify the remaining CW frequencies comparing the counter reading with the value in Table 7 2 m Press 2 M m Press 50 M 11 Check the results m If all the counter readings match the frequencies listed in Table 7 2 skip ahead to A13 A14 Fractional N Check 7 12 Source Troubleshooting DRAFT 3 21 106 15 13 m If the counter readings are incorrect at the 500 kHz and 2 MHz settings only go to FN LO at A12 Check m If all the counter readings are incorrect at all three CW frequencies the counter may be faulty Perform the Oscilloscope Method check of the signals described below If the signals are good either the A10 or A14 assemblies could be faulty Oscilloscope Method You need not use the oscilloscope me

8753D Option 011 Network Analyzer Service Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents